Toc F-1
CS 1000/CS 3000 Reference Engineering IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition
CONTENTS PART-F F1.
Engineering
System Configuration .......................................................................... F1-1 F1.1
F1.1.1
File Menu of System View ............................................................... F1-7
F1.1.2
Edit Menu of System View ............................................................ F1-13
F1.1.3
View Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-14
F1.1.4
Tool Menu of System View ............................................................ F1-17
F1.1.5
Load Menu of System View .......................................................... F1-25
F1.1.6
Project Menu of System View ....................................................... F1-33
F1.1.7
FCS Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-34
F1.1.8
HIS Menu of System View ............................................................ F1-35
F1.1.9
Help Menu of System View ........................................................... F1-36
F1.2
Creating a New Project ............................................................................... F1-37
F1.3
Project’s Attribution Utility ......................................................................... F1-46
F1.4
Project Devices Configuration ................................................................... F1-51
F1.5
F1.4.1
Creating a New FCS ..................................................................... F1-53
F1.4.2
Creating a New HIS ...................................................................... F1-89
F1.4.3
Creating a New BCV ..................................................................... F1-94
F1.4.4
Creating a New CGW ................................................................... F1-95
F1.4.5
Creating a New SCS ..................................................................... F1-99
F1.4.6
Creating a New Station ............................................................... F1-100
Creating a New IOM .................................................................................. F1-104 F1.5.1
Creating a Node ......................................................................... F1-105
F1.5.2
Creating a New I/O Module .......................................................... F1-111
F1.6
Project Data Backup ................................................................................. F1-118
F1.7
FCS Automatic Backup ............................................................................ F1-127
F1.8
F2.
System View .................................................................................................. F1-2
F1.7.1
Automatic Backup of FCS Database ........................................... F1-128
F1.7.2
FCS Database Diagnosis ........................................................... F1-131
F1.7.3
Project Database Error Handling ................................................ F1-135
Software Configuration Viewer ................................................................ F1-136
Engineering Common Items ................................................................ F2-1 F2.1
Names ............................................................................................................ F2-2
F2.2
Comment ....................................................................................................... F2-7
F2.3
File Types ...................................................................................................... F2-9 IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-2 F2.4
Structure of Folders and Files .................................................................... F2-20
F2.5
Utilization of External Files ......................................................................... F2-39
F2.6
F3.
F4.
F2.5.1
Export ........................................................................................... F2-40
F2.5.2
Import ........................................................................................... F2-41
Customization of System View Folder Icons ............................................. F2-50
Control Drawing Builder ....................................................................... F3-1 F3.1
Changing Drawing File Settings .................................................................. F3-8
F3.2
Changing Grid ............................................................................................. F3-10
F3.3
Registering Function Blocks ...................................................................... F3-11
F3.4
Changing Function Block Properties ........................................................ F3-24
F3.5
Changing Data Link Block Properties ....................................................... F3-32
F3.6
Changing Function Block Control Sequence ............................................ F3-34
F3.7
Changing Block Symbol Tag Name ........................................................... F3-35
F3.8
Changing Block Symbol Model Name ....................................................... F3-36
F3.9
Entering Block Symbol Connection Information ...................................... F3-38
F3.10
Changing Block Symbol Terminal Name ................................................... F3-39
F3.11
Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols ........................................ F3-40
F3.12
Drawing Wiring ............................................................................................ F3-42
F3.13
Changing Wiring Properties ....................................................................... F3-47
F3.14
Inserting and Deleting Connection Point for Wiring ................................. F3-48
F3.15
Displaying Text ............................................................................................ F3-49
F3.16
Changing Text Properties ........................................................................... F3-50
F3.17
Moving an Object ........................................................................................ F3-52
F3.18
Copying an Object ...................................................................................... F3-60
F3.19
Cutting an Object ........................................................................................ F3-63
F3.20
Deleting an Object....................................................................................... F3-65
F3.21
Function Block Overview Dialog ................................................................ F3-68
F3.22
Import and Export Text File ........................................................................ F3-73
F3.23
Importing CS Source File ........................................................................... F3-78
F3.24
Starting Function Block Overview Builder ................................................ F3-85
F3.25
Starting Function Block Detail Builder ...................................................... F3-86
F3.26
Start Related Builder ................................................................................... F3-88
F3.27
Setting Constants ....................................................................................... F3-90
F3.28
Status Display Settings for Control Drawings .......................................... F3-93
Editing Logic Chart ............................................................................... F4-1 F4.1
Overview of Logic Chart Edit Window ......................................................... F4-2
F4.2
Changing Grid ............................................................................................. F4-10
F4.3
Setting File Properties ................................................................................ F4-11
F4.4
Setting Object Properties ........................................................................... F4-13
F4.5
Element Symbol Type and Element Resource Count ............................... F4-20
F4.6
Switching to Mode for Editing Objects ...................................................... F4-30
F4.7
Drawing and Editing an Element Symbol .................................................. F4-31 IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-3 F4.8
Drawing and Editing Wirings ...................................................................... F4-38
F4.9
Displaying and Editing Text ........................................................................ F4-45
F4.10
Drawing and Executing a Switch View ...................................................... F4-47
F4.11
Setting Processing Timing ......................................................................... F4-49
F4.12
Setting Logic Operation Execution Order ................................................. F4-51
F4.13
Grouping Objects ........................................................................................ F4-53
F4.14
Importing and Exporting an External File .................................................. F4-56
F4.15
Status Display Settings for Logic Charts .................................................. F4-57
F5.
Status Display Builder .......................................................................... F5-1
F6.
Editing SFC ........................................................................................... F6-1
F7.
F8.
F9.
F6.1
Switching to Selection Mode ........................................................................ F6-3
F6.2
Drawing a Step .............................................................................................. F6-4
F6.3
Drawing a Wait Step ...................................................................................... F6-6
F6.4
Drawing a Transition ..................................................................................... F6-7
F6.5
Drawing a Parallel Sequence ....................................................................... F6-8
F6.6
Drawing Selective Sequences .................................................................... F6-12
F6.7
Drawing a Loop ........................................................................................... F6-16
F6.8
Drawing a Link ............................................................................................ F6-19
F6.9
Drawing a Jump .......................................................................................... F6-20
F6.10
Adding Comments to Client Area .............................................................. F6-22
F6.11
Creating an Interrupt Step .......................................................................... F6-23
F6.12
Drawing a Double Height Step ................................................................... F6-24
F6.13
Renumbering Steps ................................................................................... F6-26
F6.14
Defining Step Attribute ............................................................................... F6-27
F6.15
Defining Transition Attribute ...................................................................... F6-31
F6.16
Call up Step Action Edit Window ............................................................... F6-32
F6.17
Editing Interrupt Steps ............................................................................... F6-33
F6.18
How to Use FCS Sequence Library ............................................................ F6-34
Windows for Configuring Unit ............................................................. F7-1 F7.1
Configuring Unit Instrument ........................................................................ F7-2
F7.2
Defining Operations ...................................................................................... F7-5
FCS Sequence Library.......................................................................... F8-1 F8.1
Defining a SEBOL User Function in FCS Sequence Library ...................... F8-3
F8.2
Defining an SFC Sequence in FCS Sequence Library ................................ F8-5
F8.3
Defining a Unit Procedure in FCS Sequence Library .................................. F8-7
Security Policy ...................................................................................... F9-1 F9.1
User ............................................................................................................... F9-8
F9.2
User Group .................................................................................................. F9-28
F9.3
Privilege Level ............................................................................................. F9-34
F9.4
Function Block Security ............................................................................. F9-39
F9.5
Operation Mark ........................................................................................... F9-44
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-4 F9.6
F9.7
Advanced Security Settings ....................................................................... F9-49 F9.6.1
Defining Window Operation and Monitoring Authorities ................. F9-53
F9.6.2
Defining Function Block Operation and Monitoring Authorities ...... F9-54
F9.6.3
Operation Mark Security Level Definition ...................................... F9-62
F9.6.4
Definition of Password Control Modes .......................................... F9-64
HIS Security ................................................................................................. F9-65
F10. Scheduler ............................................................................................ F10-1 F11. Self-Documentation ............................................................................ F11-1 F11.1
Self-Document Printing .............................................................................. F11-3
F11.2
Specifying Print Range for Self-Document Printing ............................... F11-10
F11.3
Editing Header and Footer for Self-Document Printing .......................... F11-12
F11.4
Specifying Print Type for Self-Document Printing .................................. F11-14
F11.5
Editing Table of Contents for Self-Document Printing ........................... F11-15
F11.6
Drawing Select Print of Self-Documentation ........................................... F11-19
F11.7
Print Parameters ....................................................................................... F11-21
F11.8
Specifying Print Range for Tuning Parameters ....................................... F11-22
F11.9
Editing Header and Footer for Tuning Parameters ................................. F11-23
F11.10 Printing Self Documents to PDF Files (Acrobat 5.0) ............................... F11-24 F11.10.1 Setup (Acrobat 5.0) ......................................................................F11-26 F11.10.2 Printing PDF Files (Acrobat 5.0) ...................................................F11-31 F11.10.3 Viewing PDF Files (Acrobat 5.0) ................................................. F11-33 F11.11
Printing Self Documents to PDF Files (Acrobat 6.0) ............................... F11-34 F11.11.1 Setup (Acrobat 6.0) ......................................................................F11-36 F11.11.2 Printing PDF Files (Acrobat 6.0) ...................................................F11-41 F11.11.3 Viewing PDF Files (Acrobat 6.0) ................................................. F11-44
F12. Graphic Builder ................................................................................... F12-1 F12.1
Optimizing Graphic Window Display Size ................................................. F12-6 F12.1.1
Settings Recommended for Windows ........................................... F12-7
F12.1.2
HIS and Graphic Builder Setup Items ............................................ F12-8
F12.1.3
Values Recommended for Graphic Window Size .......................... F12-9
F12.1.4
Calculating Graphic Window Display Size ................................... F12-11
F12.2
Assigning Softkeys to a Graphic Window ............................................... F12-15
F12.3
Data Bind ................................................................................................... F12-18
F12.4
Importing a Bitmap File into the Graphic Window .................................. F12-28
F12.5
Saving a Graphic Object as a Part ........................................................... F12-31
F12.6
External File for Search and Replace ....................................................... F12-33
F12.7
Creating a New Graphic Window ............................................................. F12-39 F12.7.1
Type Tab ..................................................................................... F12-40
F12.7.2
Set Details Tab ............................................................................ F12-42
F12.8
List of Graphic Builder Menus ................................................................. F12-44
F12.9
Graphic Builder Toolbar List .................................................................... F12-50
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-5 F12.10 Setting Properties for Files....................................................................... F12-57 F12.10.1 Attribute Tab ............................................................................... F12-58 F12.10.2 Data Bind Tab - File Properties .................................................... F12-60 F12.10.3 Window Linked Function Tab ...................................................... F12-65 F12.11 Setting the Options ................................................................................... F12-66 F12.12 Tools Used to Create and Edit Graphic Objects ...................................... F12-69 F12.12.1 Selecting the Objects .................................................................. F12-70 F12.12.2 Modifying the Objects ................................................................. F12-71 F12.12.3 Drawing Freehand Lines and Graphics ....................................... F12-75 F12.12.4 Drawing a Straight Line ............................................................... F12-78 F12.12.5 Drawing a Polyline ...................................................................... F12-80 F12.12.6 Drawing an Arc ........................................................................... F12-82 F12.12.7 Drawing a Rectangle .................................................................. F12-84 F12.12.8 Drawing a Fill Area ...................................................................... F12-86 F12.12.9 Drawing a Circle ......................................................................... F12-88 F12.12.10 Drawing an Ellipse ...................................................................... F12-90 F12.12.11 Drawing a Sector ........................................................................ F12-92 F12.12.12 Drawing a Marker ....................................................................... F12-94 F12.12.13 Displaying Text ........................................................................... F12-96 F12.12.14 Displaying Data with Numeric Values or Character Strings .......... F12-98 F12.12.15 Displaying Data Using Rectangular Bar .................................... F12-101 F12.12.16 Displaying Data Using Arrow Bar .............................................. F12-104 F12.12.17 Displaying Data Using Circle Bar .............................................. F12-107 F12.12.18 Displaying Data Using Line-Segment Graph ..............................F12-110 F12.12.19 Displaying Data Using User-Defined Line-Segment Graph ........ F12-112 F12.12.20 Displaying Data Using Bar Graph .............................................. F12-114 F12.12.21 Displaying Data Using Step Graph ............................................. F12-116 F12.12.22 Displaying Data Using Radar Chart ........................................... F12-118 F12.12.23 Displaying Data Using Two-Dimensional Graph ........................ F12-120 F12.12.24 Creating Touch Target ............................................................... F12-122 F12.12.25 Displaying Push Button ............................................................. F12-124 F12.12.26 Displaying Faceplate Block Button ............................................ F12-127 F12.12.27 Displaying Instrument Diagram ................................................. F12-129 F12.12.28 Displaying Window Information ................................................. F12-131 F12.12.29 Displaying Message ................................................................. F12-133 F12.12.30 Displaying Dialog Name ........................................................... F12-135 F12.12.31 Displaying Trend Data .............................................................. F12-137 F12.12.32 Creating Overview Object ......................................................... F12-139 F12.12.33 Creating Control Object ............................................................ F12-142 F12.13 Setting Properties for Graphic Objects ................................................. F12-144 F12.13.1 General Tab .............................................................................. F12-146 F12.13.2 Line Tab .................................................................................... F12-148
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-6 F12.13.3 Fill Tab ...................................................................................... F12-152 F12.13.4 Text Tab .................................................................................... F12-155 F12.13.5 Graphic Modify Tab ................................................................... F12-157 F12.13.6 Modify Coordinates Tab ............................................................ F12-165 F12.13.7 Marker Tab ............................................................................... F12-169 F12.13.8 Process Data-Character Tab ..................................................... F12-170 F12.13.9 Process Data-Bar Tab ............................................................... F12-175 F12.13.10 Process Data-Arrow Tab ........................................................... F12-179 F12.13.11 Process Data-Circle Tab ........................................................... F12-183 F12.13.12 Line-Segment Graph Tab .......................................................... F12-186 F12.13.13 User-Defined Line-Segment Graph Tab .................................... F12-189 F12.13.14 Bar Graph Tab .......................................................................... F12-192 F12.13.15 Step Graph Tab ........................................................................ F12-195 F12.13.16 Radar Chart Tab ....................................................................... F12-198 F12.13.17 Two-Dimensional Graph Tab ..................................................... F12-201 F12.13.18 Control Tab ............................................................................... F12-203 F12.13.19 Function Tab ............................................................................. F12-204 F12.13.20 Function Tab [Call Window] ....................................................... F12-206 F12.13.21 Function Tab [Execute the System Function Key] ...................... F12-210 F12.13.22 Function Tab [Start/Stop/Restart Trend] .................................... F12-212 F12.13.23 Function Tab [LED Flashing/On/Off Specification] ..................... F12-213 F12.13.24 Function Tab [Execute the Program by File Name] .................... F12-214 F12.13.25 Function Tab [Instrument Command Operation] ........................ F12-216 F12.13.26 Function Tab [Call Data Input Dialog] ........................................ F12-218 F12.13.27 Function Tab [Call Menu Dialog] ............................................... F12-220 F12.13.28 Function Tab [Data-Item-Dependent Menu Dialog] ................... F12-222 F12.13.29 Function Tab [Execute Multimedia] ........................................... F12-225 F12.13.30 Function Tab [Report Printout]................................................... F12-227 F12.13.31 Function Tab [Call Panel Set] .................................................... F12-228 F12.13.32 Function Tab [Others] ................................................................ F12-229 F12.13.33 Menu Tab .................................................................................. F12-230 F12.13.34 Faceplate Block Button Tab ...................................................... F12-234 F12.13.35 Label Tab .................................................................................. F12-235 F12.13.36 Instrument Diagram Tab ............................................................ F12-237 F12.13.37 Window Tab .............................................................................. F12-239 F12.13.38 Dialog Name Tab ...................................................................... F12-241 F12.13.39 Message Tab ............................................................................ F12-242 F12.13.40 Trend Tab ................................................................................. F12-244 F12.13.41 Overview Tab ............................................................................ F12-246 F12.13.42 Overview Tab [Tag Name] ......................................................... F12-248 F12.13.43 Overview Tab [Window] ............................................................ F12-250 F12.13.44 Overview Tab [Annunciator] ...................................................... F12-252
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-7 F12.13.45 Overview Tab [Comment] .......................................................... F12-254 F12.13.46 Data Bind Tab – Object Properties ............................................ F12-256 F12.14 User-Defined Faceplate .......................................................................... F12-258 F12.14.1 Analog User-Defined Faceplate ................................................ F12-259 F12.14.2 Discrete User-Defined Faceplate .............................................. F12-269 F12.14.3 Compound Block User-Defined Faceplate ................................ F12-272 F12.14.4 Procedure for Calling a User-Defined Faceplate Window .......... F12-273 F12.15 Debugging on the Graphic Builder ........................................................ F12-277 F12.16 Importing CS Source Files ..................................................................... F12-280 F12.17 Graphic Utility ......................................................................................... F12-285
F13. Linked Parts ........................................................................................ F13-1 F13.1
Outline of Linked Parts ............................................................................... F13-2
F13.2
Management of Linked Parts ..................................................................... F13-6
F13.3
F13.4
F13.5
F13.2.1
Linked Part Files ........................................................................... F13-7
F13.2.2
Linked-Part List Window ............................................................... F13-9
Editing and Creating Linked Parts ........................................................... F13-17 F13.3.1
Functions of Linked-Part Editor Window ..................................... F13-19
F13.3.2
Registering Other Objects as Linked Parts .................................. F13-22
Inserting a Linked Part to Graphic Window ............................................. F13-25 F13.4.1
Editing a Linked Part Object ........................................................ F13-27
F13.4.2
Setting Linked Part Object Properties ......................................... F13-29
Updating and Downloading Linked Part Objects .................................... F13-34 F13.5.1
Starting Linked Part Update Dialog ............................................. F13-35
F13.5.2
Functions of Update Linked Part Dialog Box ............................... F13-36
F13.5.3
Update and Download ................................................................ F13-41
F14. Graphic Container .............................................................................. F14-1 F14.1
Licensing Mechanisms for the ActiveX Control ........................................ F14-4
F14.2
Flow from Creating an ActiveX Control to Displaying it in a Graphic Window ................................................................................... F14-5
F14.3
F14.2.1
Creating an ActiveX Control .......................................................... F14-8
F14.2.2
Creating a Setup Disk for the ActiveX Control ............................. F14-23
F14.2.3
Embedding in a Graphic Window ................................................ F14-32
F14.2.4
Downloading to HIS .................................................................... F14-33
F14.2.5
Setting up ActiveX Control .......................................................... F14-34
F14.2.6
Displaying Graphic Window ........................................................ F14-35
F14.2.7
Creating ActiveX Controls ........................................................... F14-36
F14.2.8
Precautions on the Font Size of ActiveX Controls ........................ F14-38
Graphic Interface Control ......................................................................... F14-41 F14.3.1
Graphic Interface Control Operating Environment ....................... F14-42
F14.3.2
ActiveX Control Development Environment for Graphic Interface Control ....................................................... F14-43
F14.3.3
Interface Types ........................................................................... F14-44
F14.3.4
Property Details .......................................................................... F14-47 IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Toc F-8 F14.3.5
Event Details .............................................................................. F14-50
F14.3.6
Method Details ............................................................................ F14-57
F14.3.7
Event Notification Using a Function Key ...................................... F14-75
F15. All Generation ..................................................................................... F15-1 F15.1
Overview of All Generation ......................................................................... F15-2 F15.1.1
Problems that May Occur in FCS Engineering .............................. F15-3
F15.1.2
What is All Generation? ................................................................ F15-4
F15.2
Precautions for Using All Generation ........................................................ F15-5
F15.3
All Generation Dialog Box .......................................................................... F15-7
F16. Taglist Builder ..................................................................................... F16-1 F16.1
Definition of Tag Names ............................................................................. F16-4
F16.2
Definition of Operator Guide Messages .................................................. F16-10
F16.3
Definition of Print Messages .................................................................... F16-11
F16.4
Definition of Sequence Messages ........................................................... F16-13
F16.5
Definition of Area Names .......................................................................... F16-14
F16.6
Import and Export ..................................................................................... F16-15 F16.6.1
Import ......................................................................................... F16-16
F16.6.2
Export ......................................................................................... F16-24
F17. Engineering Coordination Between CS 3000 and SmartPlant Instrumentation ............................................................... F17-1 F17.1
Data Exchange Procedures Between CS 3000 and SmartPlant Instrumentation ..................................................................... F17-10
F17.2
Conversion of Engineering Unit Symbols ............................................... F17-20
F18. Difference Messages Displayed at FCS Download ........................... F18-1
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-1
F1. System Configuration When configuring a control system, the engineer should take the system scale into consideration and create a system configuration (engineering database) that meets the system requirements.
■ Outline of System View The System View can display the engineering data (folders or files) of the system in a tree view similar to MS Windows Explorer. Via the various menus, create a project, create FCS, HIS, I/O modules that comprise a system and various user-definable operations and monitoring windows as well as Help dialog boxes.
IMPORTANT Do not use Windows Explorer to change the files handled by System View.
■ Use the System View to Generate System From System View, the following engineering works can be implemented.
● Create Projects Create projects that are basic unit for engineering data management.
● Definition of System Configuration Types of FCS and HIS as well as their connection in the network are defined in the system configuration.
● I/O Module Definition Create engineering database for specifying the actions of the I/O modules used to acquire process data.
● Create Graphic Windows Create the user-defined Graphic windows used for operation and monitoring. SEE ALSO For Graphic window, see the following: “■ User-Defined Windows” in E2.1, “System Windows and User-Defined Windows”
● Help Dialog Box Creation The user can create arbitrary HELP messages. SEE ALSO For details on help dialog, see the following: E4.12, “Help Dialog Box”
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F1-2
F1.1 System View System View provides various taskbars in the menu. From the menu, an engineer can create projects which are the basic units for engineering data management, and create various user-definable operation and monitoring windows and Help dialog boxes used for FCS, HIS and I/O modules that comprise the project.
■ System View Menu Items ¡ £ ▼ Menu List
A list of the menu items in System View is shown below: Table System View Menu Item (1/5) ¡ £ Menu
Menu item
Cascade
Description
Project...
Creates a new project
FCS...
Creates a new FCS
HIS...
Creates a new HIS
BCV...
Creates a new BCV
CGW...
Creates a new CGW
SCS...
Creates a new ProSafe-RS SCS (*1)
State Transition Matrix... Creates a new State Transition Matrix
File
Create New
SEBOL User Function...
Creates a new user-defined SEBOL function
SFC Sequence...
Creates a new SFC sequence
Unit Procedure...
Creates a new unit procedure
FCS-C Task...
Creates a new FCS-C task (*2)
Node...
Creates a new Node (*3)
Nest...
Creates a new Nest (*4)
IOM...
Creates a new I/O module
Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment...
Creates a new trend acquisition pen assignment (*1)
Window...
Creates a new window
Common Block...
Creates a new common block (*5)
Recipe Group...
Creates a new recipe group (*5)
Station...
Creates a new non-CS 1000/CS 3000 series F010101E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
£ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system. ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS. When applying this package, please contact Yokogawa for more information. £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2. This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.
SEE ALSO • For more information about RFCS5 and RFCS2, see the following: Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM 33Q01B41-01E) • For more information about SCS, see the User’s Manuals attached to ProSafe-RS products.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-3
Table System View Menu Item (2/5) ¡ £ Menu
Menu item
Cascade
• Opens selected folder • Starts builders to edit the selected files
Open
External File
Description
Import Window Hierarchy...
Imports window hierarchy information
Export Window Hierarchy...
Exports window hierarchy information
Delete
Deletes selected engineering data
Properties...
Displays the properties of selected file or folder
Domain Properties...
File
Print Preview
Displays the domain properties (*1)
Project Property
Displays print preview of the project property
Domain Properties
Displays print preview of the domain properties (*1)
Station Property
Displays print preview of the FCS and HIS property
State Transition Matrix List
Displays print preview of the state transition matrix list
SEBOL User’s Function List
Displays print preview of the SEBOL user-defined function list
SFC Sequence List
Displays print preview of the SFC Sequence list
Unit Procedure List
Displays print preview of the unit procedure list
FCS-C Program List
Displays print preview of the FCS-C program list (*2)
Node Property
Displays print preview of the node property (*3)
Nest Properties
Displays print preview of nest properties (*4)
IOM Property
Displays print preview of the IOM property
Control Drawing List
Displays print preview of the control drawing list
Window Hierarchy
Displays print preview of the window hierarchy
Window List
Displays print preview of the window list
Common Block List
Displays print preview of the common block list (*5) F010102E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
£ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system. ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS. £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2. This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.
SEE ALSO For more information about RFCS5 and RFCS2, see the following: Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM 33Q01B41-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-4
Table System View Menu Item (3/5) ¡ £ Menu
Menu item
Cascade
Description
Project Property
Prints the project property
Domain Properties
Prints the domain properties (*1)
Station Property
Prints the FCS and HIS property
State Transition Matrix Prints the list of State Transition Matrixes List
File
Edit
Print
SEBOL User’s Function List
Prints the SEBOL user-defined function list
SFC Sequence List
Prints the SFC Sequence list
Unit Procedure List
Prints the unit procedure list
FCS-C Program List
Prints the FCS-C program list (*2)
Node Property
Prints the node property (*3)
Nest Properties
Prints the properties of nest (*4)
IOM Property
Prints the IOM property
Control Drawing List
Prints the control drawing list
Window Hierarchy
Prints the window hierarchy
Window List
Prints the window list
Common Block List
Prints the common block list (*5)
Exit System View
Exits System View
Cut
Cut
Copy
Copy
Paste
Paste
Paste Shortcut
Pastes shortcut
Move Upward
Moves up
Move Downward
Moves down F010103E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
£ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system. ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS. £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2. This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.
SEE ALSO For more information about RFCS5 and RFCS2, see the following: Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM 33Q01B41-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-5
Table System View Menu Item (4/5) ¡ £ Menu
View
Menu item
Cascade
Description
Toolbar
Shows or hides the toolbar
Status bar
Shows or hides the status bar
Message Display Area
Shows or hides the message display area
Large Icons
Displays the data list area using large icons
Small Icons
Displays the data list area using small icons
List
Displays the data list area as a list
Details
Displays the details of the data list area
Arrange Icons
System Order
Displays the icons in the data list area by System Order
By Name
Displays the icons in the data list area by name
By Date
Displays the icons in the data list area by date
All Control Drawing Display
Displays all control drawings
Refresh
Displays the most recent conditions
Builder Quick Start
Opens the Builder Quick Start dialog box
Check for Double-Defined Tags...
Searches for function blocks with the same tag name
Reference All Elements/Tags...
Creates a tag cross reference list
Self-Document Printing...
Starts up self-document function
Print Parameters...
Prints FCS tuning parameters
Search by Name...
Searches for element numbers and tag names
Plant Hierarchy Viewer
Displays Plant Hierarchy Viewer
Logging...
Enables/disables user comment logging
Status Display Setting...
Opens the status display setting dialog box
Environment Setting...
Opens the environment setting dialog box
Tuning Parameters Saving...
Starts Tuning Parameter Saving Tool
Offline Loading...
Starts Offline Loading Tool Generate Host File...
Creates ALF111 host file set for whole project or for whole FCS
Upload All...
Uploads block parameters of all field devices in the ALF111 segment or in the FCS
Download All...
Downloads to all field devices in the ALF111 segment or in the FCS
Display Device Information...
Opens Device Panel
Software Download...
Opens Device Configuration dialog box for downloading the software.
Tools
Fieldbus (*1)
Linked Part Updating...
Opens the update linked part dialog box
Data Exchange Tool for SmartPlant Instrumentation... (*2)
Starts Data Exchange Tool
SCS Taglist Import... (*2)
Imports ProSafe-RS SCS Taglist
Set Backup...
Opens the backup setting dialog box
Start Backup...
Opens the backup specification dialog box
FCS Database Diagnosis Tool...
Starts FCS Database Diagnosis Tool
Audit Trail DB Viewer
Starts Audit Trail Database Viewer F010104E.EPS
*1: *2:
£ Valid only in the KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, RFCS5 or RFCS2 stations in which the ALF111 is configured. £ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-6
Table System View Menu Item (5/5) ¡ £ Menu
Load
Project
FCS
HIS
Help
Menu item
Cascade
Description
Download Project Common Section
Downloads common project data to HIS
Download IOM...
Downloads I/O module configuration data to FCS
Save FCS Tuning Parameter
Saves FCS tuning parameters
Off-line Download Download to FCS
Off-line Downloads the engineering data to FCS
Download to HIS
Downloads engineering data to HIS
Download Taglist...
Downloads the FCS and BCV tag list to HIS
Status Display File Download...
Downloads status display files
Offline Download to BCV
Off-line Downloads to BCV
Download Tag-List/Gateway Information
Downloads taglist of the station (non CS 1000/CS 3000 series station) and gateway information
Save BCV Operation Mark
Saves BCV operation marks
CGW Download
Downloads to CGW
Common Block Download (*1)
Downloads common blocks
Open Project...
Opens an existing project
Close Project
Closes a project
Resolve Invalid Element
Modify or recompile to clean the invalid elements after project common area modification.
Error Check
Checks the consistency of the engineering data within the FCS
Resource Information...
Opens a resource information dialog box
Test Function (*2)
Starts the Test Function
All Generation...
Opens All Generation dialog box
Virtual HIS (*3)
Start HIS functions in virtual mode. Runs Operation and monitoring functions without starting the Test Functions or FCS Simulation.
Using On-line Manual...
Displays how to use the online manual
Engineering Tutorial...
Displays the Engineering Tutorial (IM 33S04H10-01E)
Builder Definition Items...
Displays the builder definition item list
Reference Index...
Displays the reference manual index
Version Information...
Starts the Software Configuration Viewer F010105E.EPS
*1: *2: *3:
This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed. This menu is available only when Test Functions Package is installed. This menu item is available only when the Enhanced Test Functions Package is installed.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-7
F1.1.1 File Menu of System View The [File] menu and the submenus under the [File] menu of System View are explained in this section.
■ Create New ¡ £ When menu [File] - [Create New] is selected, a dialog box for creating new project appears, while when menu [File] - [Create New] is selected with a project folder selected, the dialog box for creating the FCS, HIS, IOM or windows appears. Double click an item, a new folder or a new file corresponding to the selected item in the cascade menu may be created. Table Files and Folders Created for “Create New” Menu Items (1/2) ¡ £ Menu item
Selectable folder
Folder name or file name
File or folder that is created automatically
Project
SYSTEMVIEW
User specified
Hierarchy below the project folder
FCS
Project
Folder/user-specified Hierarchy below FCS folder (excludes I/O modules FCS-C, SEBOL user functions, SFC sequence and Files under the user procedure) folder/system-fixed
HIS
Project
Folder/user-specified Hierarchy below HIS folder (Graphic windows, Help Files under the dialog boxes are not included) folder/system-fixed
BCV
Project
Folder/user-specified Files under the Hierarchy below BCV folder folder/system-fixed
CGW
Project
Folder/user-specified Files under the Hierarchy below CGW folder folder/system-fixed
SCS (*1)
Project
Folder/user-specified SCS folder
State Transition MATRIX Matrix
Matrix Number
Matrix{m} file
SEBOL User Function
File/user-specified
SEBOL user-defined function’s file
SFC_ SFC Sequence SEQUENCE
File/user-specified
SFC sequence’s file
Unit UNIT_ Procedure PROCEDURE
File/user-specified
Unit procedure’s file
SEBOL_ USER_ FUNCTION
F010106E.EPS
*1:
£ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-8
Table Files and Folders Created for “Create New” Menu Items (2/2) ¡ £ Menu item
Selectable folder
Folder name or file name
File or folder that is created automatically
FCS-C Task (*1)
FCS
File/task
FCS-C task’s file
Node (*2)
IOM
Node number
Node{n}’s folder
Nest (*3)
IOM2
Nest number
Nest{n} folder
IOM slot position and Hierarchy below IOM folder of the FCS I/O module type/ I/O nest model type NODE{n} (*2) defined when IOM Files under NODE folder of the FCS NEST{n} (*3) was configured
IOM (*4) IOM
Trend HIS Acquisition CONFIGUPen RATION Assignment (*5)
File/user-specified
Trend acquisition pen assignment’s file
WINDOW
User specified
Graphic window’s file and folder
HELP
User specified
Help dialog box’s file
Common Block (*6)
COMMONBLOCK
RDT0001 to PDT0982
Common block files RDT0950 to RDT0982
Recipe Group (*6)
BATCH
Group number defined when recipe group was created
Hierarchy below RG{n}folder
Station...
Project
Folder/user-specified Hierarchy below STN folder Files under the folder/system-fixed
Window
Menu item
Selectable folder
Folder name or file ame
File or folder that is created automatically F010107E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6:
¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS, SFCS. £ This menu item is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ This menu item is available only on RFCS5, RFCS2. ¡ £ This menu item is available only on PFCS and SFCS. £ This menu item is available only on CS 3000 system. This menu item is available only when Batch Management is installed.
SEE ALSO For more information about RFCS5 and RFCS2, see the following: Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM33Q01B41-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F1-9
■ Open When [Open] from the [File] menu is selected while a folder is selected, the folder will open. If the selected file is already opened, no change happens. When [Open] from the [File] menu is selected while a file is selected in the data list, builders for editing the engineering data will start up.
■ External File • Import Window Hierarchy Imports window hierarchy information from a text file. If there is no window that corresponds to the description in the text file, an import error will occur. • Export Window Hierarchy Exports window hierarchy information to a text file.
■ Delete When [Delete] from the [File] menu is clicked while a file or folder is selected, the selected file or folder may be deleted. However, the folders or files that may be deleted are those created in System View. The current project folder and the default project folder can not be deleted. Furthermore, when selecting a folder or file that can not be deleted, the [Delete] task bar grays out.
● Deleting a State Transition Matrix If a State Transition Matrix of an FCS is being used, the State Transition Matrix can not be deleted. A warning message will be displayed when try to delete it.
● Deleting an IOM Note the following when deleting a dual-redundant IOM: • A dual-redundant IOM (u-s IOM name Dup) cannot be deleted. If deletion operation is executed, a dialog box containing a message “Can not delete ‘u-s IOM name Dup.edf’.” will appear. • When the source IOM of a dual-redundant IOM is deleted, the dual-redundant IOM (u-s IOM name Dup) will also be deleted.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-10
■ Properties When [Properties] from the [File] menu is selected, the property tab of the selected folder or file may be displayed. Properties can be changed in the properties sheet.
IMPORTANT • For the project with “current” attribute, when clicking [OK] button after changing a FCS folder’s property, the new contents will be off-line loaded to the FCS. • For the project with “current” attribute, when clicking [OK] button after changing an I/O module’s property, the new contents will be downloaded to the I/O module. • When clicking [OK] button after changing HIS folder or user-defined windows properties, the new contents may be reflected only after downloading them separately in to HIS.
■ Domain Properties £ After selecting a station such as FCS, HIS or BCV, and then choose [Domain Properties] from [File] menu of System View, the domain properties dialog box will be displayed. On this dialog box, the control bus redundancy can be specified for the domain by checking the option box of [Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant]. This option is checked by default. The comment text for the domain can be entered on this dialog box with up to 100 alphanumeric characters or 50 double-byte characters. Properties Domain Domain Number
1
Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant Comment
OK
Cancel F010120E.EPS
Figure Domain Properties
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-11
■ Print Preview ¡ £ To select one of the following items to display the printout image as the print preview. • Project property • Domain properties (*1) • Station property • State Transition Matrix List • SEBOL user’s function list • SFC sequence list • Unit procedure list • FCS-C program list (*2) • Node property (*3) • Nest properties (*4) • IOM properties • Control drawing list • Window hierarchy • Window list • Common block list (*5) *1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
£ The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only on CS 3000 system. ¡ £ The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only on PFCS, SFCS. £ The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only on KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ The print preview for the engineering data is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2. The Print Preview for the engineering data is available only when Batch Management is installed.
TIP To run Print Preview, printer details need to be set in Windows system.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-12
■ Print ¡ £ Select one of the following items for printing. • Project property • Domain properties (*1) • Station property • State transition matrix list • SEBOL user’s function list • SFC Sequence list • Unit procedure list • FCS-C program list (*2) • Node property (*3) • Nest property (*4) • IOM properties • Control drawing list • Window hierarchy • Window list • Common block list (*5) *1: *2: *3: *4: *5:
£ Printing out the engineering data is available only on CS 3000 system. ¡ £ Printing out the engineering data is available only on PFCS, SFCS. £ Printing out the engineering data is available only onKFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2, LFCS, RFCS5 and RFCS2. £ Printing out the engineering data is available only on RFCS5 and RFCS2. Printing out the engineering data is available only when Batch Management is installed.
TIP To run Print, printer details need to be set in Windows system.
■ Exit System View Terminates the System View. When any application for builders started from System View is running, the System View can not be terminated until the builders are terminated.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-13
F1.1.2 Edit Menu of System View The [Edit] menu of System View is explained in this section.
■ Cut The folder or file selected in System View is cut from System View then put to the clipboard. The folder or the file in the clipboard will then be removed after “Paste.”
■ Copy The folders or files selected in System View are copied to the clipboard.
■ Paste The selected folders or files in the clipboard are pasted to the folder or file selected in System View.
■ Paste Shortcut An HIS window definition file is pasted to the folder selected in System View. Select [Copy] from the [Edit] menu to copy the shortcut source file to the clipboard. Then, select a window definition folder in the data tree area of the System View and select [Paste Shortcut] from the [Edit] menu. [Paste Shortcut] cannot be selected after [Cut].
■ Move Upward Select a window definition folder in the data tree area, then select [Move Upward] from the [Edit] menu. The display order of the file will move up among the windows in the same hierarchy level.
■ Move Downward Select a window definition folder in the data tree area, then select [Move Downward] from the [Edit] menu. The display order of the file will move down among the windows in the same hierarchy level.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-14
F1.1.3 View Menu of System View The [View] menu and the submenus under the [View] menu of System View are explained in this section.
■ Toolbar Toggle between show or hide the status bar.
■ Status Bar Toggle between show or hide the toolbar.
■ Message Display Area Toggle between show or hide the message display area.
■ Large Icon The files are displayed in large icons in the data list area.
■ Small Icon The files are displayed in small icons in the data list area.
■ List The file names are displayed in a list in the data list area.
■ Details The names, types and update times of the files are listed in the data list area.
■ Arrange Icons The display of the data list area may be rearranged. • System Order The files will be listed in a fixed order (System Order). When displaying files in this order there will be a check mark at [System Order] taskbar on [Arrange Icons] submenu of [View] menu. The files will be displayed in the order as the following table when the System Order is checked. The files not listed in the table will be displayed in the order by names.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-15
Table Files Displayed by System Order
Folder
File Name
PROJECT\COMMON
PROJECT\COMMON\MATRIX BATCH\RG{nn}
FCS{dd}{nn}\SWITCH
FCS{dd}{nn}\MESSAGE
Display
Multiple Projects Connection
CustomPlant.edf
Plant Hierarchy
StnConf.edf
Station configuration
UserSec.edf
Security
OpeMarkDef.edf
Operation Mark
EngUnit.edf
Engineering Unit Symbol
InstLabel.edf
Switch Position Label
SysStsLabel.edf
System Fixed Status Character String
BlkStsLabel.edf
Block Status Character String
AlmStsLabel.edf
Alarm Status Character String
AlmTbl.edf
Alarm Processing Table
AlmPri.edf
Alarm Priority
StsChange.edf
Status Change Command Character String
Same as listed left.
Matrix{m}.edf
State Transition Matrix
By numbers
TrainName.edf
Train
ProductWnd.edf
Product Control
Same as listed left.
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag
SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch
GswitchDef.edf
Global Switch
SD{nn}01.edf
Printout Message
OG{nn}01.edf
Operator Guide
EV{nn}01.edf
Signal Event
AN{nn}01.edf
Annunciator
FCS{dd}{nn}\FUNCTION_BLOCK .edf \DR{mmmm}
HIS{dd}{nn}\CONFIGURATION
Type
MultiPjt.edf
Same as listed left.
Same as listed left.
By defined order (*1)
Function Block Detail
OpeconDef.edf
HIS Constants
Scheduler.edf
Scheduler
MsgReqDef.edf
Sequence Message Request
FuncKey.edf
Assign Function Keys
PanelSet.edf
Panel Set
TR{rrrr}.edf
Trend acquisition pen assignment
Same as listed left.
.edf HIS{dd}{nn}\WINDOW
.edf Graphic
By window hierarchies (*2)
.edf .edf
Trend display pen assignment F010108E.EPS
*1: *2:
The function blocks are listed in the defined order. Windows are displayed according to their hierarchies.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F1-16
• By Name The data list area is displayed in order of the names of the icons. When displayed by name, it is indicated by a check mark beside [By Name] in the [Display] menu. • By Date The data list area is displayed in order of the date of the icons. When displayed by date, it is indicated by a check mark beside [By Date] in the [Display] menu.
■ All Control Drawing Display When [All control drawing display] is checked, all control drawings including the empty drawings are displayed in the file list, otherwise only the defined drawings are displayed. [All control drawing display] is the default setting.
■ Refresh When editing is performed using the builder, the information displayed in System View may be different from the actual engineering data. When [Refresh] is selected, the data tree and the data list in System View are displayed with the most recent information.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-17
F1.1.4 Tool Menu of System View The [Tools] menu of System View is explained in this section.
■ Builder Quick Start Displays the builder quick start dialog box. By entering the builder window name, element name, user-defined label or tag name to this dialog box, the corresponding builder can be started directly. In general, a builder is started by choosing its icon by unfolding the folders in the tree view of System View. For an example, to start a control drawing builder, open - [FCS] folder[FUNCTION BLOCK] folder, then choose the control drawing file on the list view of System View can start the control drawing builder. With this builder quick start dialog box, the control drawing builder can be started (the drawing file is openned) directly by entering a tag name of a function block defined in the control drawing. Builder Quick Start Name
Start F010116E.EPS
Figure Builder Quick Start Dialog Box
■ Check for Double-Defined Tags Searches for function blocks with the same tag name within a project. The window names in HIS will also be searched for checking double-defined tags, so that if an identical tag name and window name can also be found. The result of search will be displayed with window names, comments and station names. The related builder can be started directly using the window name or the tag name in the search result.
■ Reference All Elements/Tags Creates a list of all element numbers and tag names within the range specified in the dialog box.
■ Self Document Printing Displays the window for self documentation.
■ Print Parameters Displays the window for printing saved tuning parameters.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-18
■ Search by Name Searches for element numbers or tag names within the range specified in the dialog box (by project, by station). The related builder can be started directly using the element name or the tag name in the search result.
■ Plant Hierarchy Viewer Displays the plant hierarchy of the project.
■ Logging User Comment Logging can be enabled or disabled as necessary. User comments are logged to manage a history of operations in various builders. When logging of user comments is enabled, a dialog box for entering user comments such as the reason for changing configuration will be displayed whenever the builders overwrite the current configuration by a Save or Download operation. Logging Specification Enable User Comment Logging? Enable User Comment Logging Disable User Comment Logging OK
Cancel
F010109E.EPS
Figure Logging Specification Dialog Box
■ Status Display Setting The Status Display Setting dialog box is used to set the display color of the wiring and the font of the process data in the HIS status display window. It is possible to set these settings for both the Control Drawing and Logic Chart. This setting is made in project units. SEE ALSO • For details on the settings for Control Drawings in the Status Display Setting dialog box, see the following: F3.28, “Status Display Settings for Control Drawings” • For details on the settings for the Logic Charts in the Status Display Setting dialog box, see the following: F4.15, “Status Display Settings for Logic Charts”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-19
■ Environment Setting The tool for setting the generation environment and the printing environment of Graphic Builder is started. Environment Setting Standard Set Generation Display Downloading Confirmation Dialog Graphic Builder Print window back ground color when specifying color print Specify items to print Print All Set individually Screen Image Data Bind Modify Information HIS-Specific Primitive Information Linked-Part Information
Execute color print or monochrome print regardless of the printer setting Priority to printer setting Forced Monochrome Print Forced Color Print
OK
Cancel F010114E.EPS
Figure Environment Setting Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F1-20
● Display Downloading Confirmation Dialog If you check this check box, the Downloading Confirmation dialog box appears when you perform downloading in a builder related to FCSs. Data downloaded to an FCS is displayed in the Downloading Confirmation dialog box. This information is also displayed in the message display area of System View. Downloading confirmation dialog Starting generation Change FcIoInfoOfUnitHead Train=1 Change FcIoDetDefTbl Train=1 Change IOM Config Train=1 Change AMC80 Config Train=1 Change Generation Time of Station Change Generation Time of Area Detecting difference end
Node=1 Node=1 Node=1 Node=1
Unit=3 Unit=3 Slot=1 Unit=3 Slot=1 Term=1 Unit=3 Slot=1 Term=1
Dowmload to FCS ? OK
Cancel F010117E.EPS
Figure Downloading Confirmation Dialog
Downloading to the FCS is started if you click the [OK] button in the Downloading Confirmation dialog box. Click the [Cancel] button to cancel downloading to the FCS. The following Downloading Confirmation dialog box appears for some of the builders related to Fieldbus Builder. Downloading Confirmation dialog
Download to FCS ? Yes
No F010118E.EPS
Figure Downloading Confirmation Dialog
● Print Window Background Color when Specifying Color Print The background color is printed if the checkbox is checked.
● Specify Items to Print Make settings so that only the items necessary for Graphic Builder are printed. If [Print All] is selected, all items are printed. If [Set individually] is selected, Screen Image, Data Bind, Modify Information, HIS Specific Primitive Information, and Linked Part Information can be selected to be printed.
● Execute Color Print or Monochrome Print regardless of the Printer Setting How items are printed using Graphic Builder can be specified. If [Priority to printer setting] is selected, the selected items are printed according to Windows NT's printer setting. If [Forced Monochrome Print] is selected, they are printed in monochrome regardless of the printer setting. If [Forced Color Print] is selected, they are printed in color regardless of the printer setting.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-21
■ Tuning Parameters Saving Starts a tool to save the tuning parameters of selected FCSs continuously. Tuning parameters save continuously PROJECT: STATION FCS0101 FCS0102
MYPJT
COMM... PFCD-E PFCD-E
RESULTS... MODIFIED TIME Before Exe... Before Exe...
SELECT ALL ALL CLEAR
PREVIOUS RESULT
TUNING PARAMETER SAVE
CLOSE F010119E.EPS
Figure Tuning Parameters Save Continuously Tool
■ Offline Loading Starts a tool to perform off-line download continuously to the selected FCSs.
■ Fieldbus : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ The following five fieldbus related tasks are displayed in the cascade menu. • Generate Host File • Upload All • Download All • Display Device Information • Software Download
● Generate Host File : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Generates a host file set for ALF111 (Fieldbus H1 Communication Module). SEE ALSO For more information about generating host file set, see the following: “■ Host File Set Generation” in D1.6, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F1-22
● Upload All : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Starts a tool to upload fieldbus device parameters of the whole FCS or whole ALF111 (Fieldbus HI Communication Module) segment. SEE ALSO For more information about fieldbus overall upload, see the following: “■ Fieldbus Overall Upload” in D1.6, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
● Download All : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Starts a downloading tool so as to download to all filedbus devices in the segment of ALF111 (fieldbus H1 module) or in the FCS. SEE ALSO For more information about fieldbus overall download, see the following: “■ Download to All Fieldbus Devices” in D1.6, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
● Display Device Information : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Opens Device Panel for displaying the information of fieldbus devices. SEE ALSO For more information about displaying fieldbus devices information, see the following: D5, “Device Panel” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
● Software Download : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Opens Device Configuration dialog box for downloading the software to the fieldbus devices. SEE ALSO For more information about Software download, see the following: E2, “Software Download” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-23
■ Update Linked Part The tool for updating linked parts is started. SEE ALSO For the details on updating linked parts, see the following: F13, “Linked Parts”
■ Data Exchange Tool for SmartPlant Instrumentation : KFCS2/KFCS/ FFCS £ A tool can be started for exchanging data between CS 3000 and SmartPlant Instrumentation. SEE ALSO For more information about data exchange between CS 3000 and SmartPlant Instrumentation, see the following: F17, “Engineering Coordination Between CS 3000 and SmartPlant Instrumentation”
■ SCS Taglist Import £ When integrating CS 3000 and ProSafe-RS projects, the taglists of ProSafe-RS SCSs (Safety Control Stations) need to be generated. SEE ALSO For more information about SCS taglist generation, see the following: 2.2.2, “Taglist Generation” in Integration with CENTUM CS 3000 (IM 32S01E10-01E)
■ Backup Setting The tool for making settings for project data backup is started. SEE ALSO For the details on the backup settings, see the following: F1.6, “Project Data Backup”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-24
■ Start Backup The tool for backing up project data is started. SEE ALSO For how to use the backup tool, see the following: F1.6, “Project Data Backup”
■ FCS Database Diagnosis Tool The FCS database consistency check tool is started. SEE ALSO For the explanation about the FCS database diagnosis tool, see the following: “■ FCS Database Diagnosis Tool” in F1.7.2, “FCS Database Diagnosis”
■ Audit Trail DB Viewer Starts Audit Trail Database Viewer so as to view the audit trails. SEE ALSO • For more information about engineering audit trail database viewer, see the following: P3.4, “Browsing Audit Trail Data” • For more information about recipe management audit trail database viewer, see the following: P7.4, “Browsing Audit Trail Data”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-25
F1.1.5 Load Menu of System View The [Load] menu and the submenus under the [Load] menu of System View are explained in this section.
■ Download Project Common Section When [Download Project Common Section] is selected on the [Load] menu, a confirmation message box for downloading the common part of the project configuration will appear. Clicking the [OK] button in the message box may download the contents defined in the project builders into HIS, UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) and HP9000. Whenever adding or removing a FCS or HIS, it is required to carry out the project common download from System View. If a project folder is selected, definition contents are downloaded to every HIS, UHMIS ( Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) and HP9000 in the project. If an HIS folder is selected, it is downloaded only to the selected HIS.
■ Download IOM When the [Download to IOM] on the [Load] menu is clicked while the FCS folder of the current project is selected, the IOM download dialog box will appear. When [OK] is clicked while the IOM is selected from the IOM download dialog box, the engineering data for the selected FCS I/O modules will be downloaded. Choosing an I/O module nest on the IOM download dialog box can pop out a new box for selecting an I/O module for downloading.
IMPORTANT IOM download may not be performed to FCS that has not been through off-line FCS download before. SEE ALSO For details on FCS off-line download, see the following of later section: “■ Offline-Download to FCS”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-26
IMPORTANT When the items indicated below are changed and the IOM download is performed, the I/O module will be stopped. • When the type of a thermocouple, or the range is changed • When the attributes of process data such as square root extraction or IOP detection specifications are changed When the I/O module stops, the following actions occur for the function block connected to the I/O module. • Input data The previous value is retained. When the I/O module returns to normal, the new values may be accessed. • Output data For analog outputs, output values are retained when the changes do not affect the output values. In the case of contact outputs, the output may be turned off or to hold previous good value. SEE ALSO For the details on the IOM behaviors when IOM downloading is performed, see the following: B3.5, “Operation of I/O Module when Downloading is Performed”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-27
■ Save FCS Tuning Parameter IMPORTANT • FCS tuning parameter save may not be performed to FCS that has not been through off-line FCS download before. • The saved tuning parameters take precedence over the constants upon off-line downloading to an FCS, while the constants take precedence over the unsaved tuning parameters upon initial off-line downloading to an FCS. • When online downloading to an FCS, the constants are compared to the current saved tuning parameters for a modified function block. If those are not identical, the constants will override the existing tuning parameters on the FCS. • When saving the tuning parameters, it is recommended to close Control Drawing Builder, the Function Block Overview Builder and the Function Block Detail Builder.
When [Save FCS Tuning Parameter] is selected from the [Load] menu while the FCS folder of the current project is selected, a message dialog box is displayed. Clicking on [OK] in the message dialog box saves the tuning parameters of the selected FCS. Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter Perform tuning parameter save for Project 'MYPJT' FCS 'FCS0101' ? OK
Cancel F010110E.EPS
Figure Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter Dialog Box
During virtual test, the parameters for the FCS within the testing project may be saved. The saving procedure is the same as the procedure for saving parameters in current project. By using the import operation on the Function Block Overview Builder, Function Block Detail Builder and Control Drawing Builder of the current project, the FCS tuning parameters of a virtually tested project may be applied to the current project.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-28
■ Offline-Download to FCS IMPORTANT When FCS off-line download is executed, the target FCS stops.
● Download When [Download] is clicked on [Offline-Download to FCS] task bar of the [Load] menu while an FCS folder of the current project or default projects selected, Confirm Offline Downloading to FCS dialog box appears. Confirm offline downloading to FCS Perform offline download to Project 'MYPJT' FCS 'FCS0101' ?
OK
Cancel F010111E.EPS
Figure Confirm Offline Downloading to FCS Dialog Box
Click [OK] button on the dialog box, a message box prompting for saving tuning parameters of the selected FCS appears. Confirm to save FCS Tuning Parameter When offline downloading to FCS, the tuning parameters will be lost. Save tuning parameters of Project: 'MYPJT', Station: 'FCS0101' ? Yes
No F010115E.EPS
Figure Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-29
Click [OK] button on “Confirm to Save FCS Tuning Parameter” dialog box to start saving the parameters. Clock [No], download continues without saving the parameters. If the parameters are saved, the parameters are kept in the FCS database. After the invalid elements are resolved, downloading to FCS starts. During downloading, the process will be indicted by the messages in the Generation Dialog window. Generation Dialog - [Pjt:MYPJT Stn:FCS0101] Start Offline Downloading Fri Nov 19 18:30:19 1999 Started off-line load FCS0101 Fri Nov 19 18:30:37 1999 Initializing... FCS Ioading... FCS program size = 4834928 bytes Ioading... FCS database size = 3805184 bytes Ioading... IOM database size = 5256 bytes Equalize start. HIS0124 Equalize completed successfully. HIS0124 Off-line load ended Fri Nov 19 18:31:51 1999 Completed Offline Downloading Fri Nov 19 18:31:51 1999
Close F010113E.EPS
Figure Generation Dialog Box
● Precautions when Offline Downloading • “Off-line download to FCS” may transfer all FCS related engineering information to the FCS after stopping the FCS. • When the FCS off-line download is executed, the tuning parameters of the function blocks in the FCS memory will be overwritten. In order to prevent the tuning parameters from being changed, the tuning parameters should be saved prior to the FCS off-line download. By saving the tuning parameters to the source files, when the FCS off-line download is executed to the FCS, the saved tuning parameters can be transferred along with the contents defined on the FCS builder. If the tuning parameters are not saved, the default values of the tuning parameters when each function block is created or the parameters saved before previous downloading will be downloaded. • If the fixed constants of the function block are set as parameters, the saved tuning parameters will have precedence over them. • When “Off-line download to FCS” is performed for the first time, saving the tuning parameters is not necessary.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-30
■ Download to HIS When [Download to HIS] is clicked on the [Load] menu while a project folder or hierarchies below the HIS folder of the current project is selected, [Confirm download to HIS] dialog box will be displayed. Clicking [OK] button in the message box may download the information in the folders below the selected hierarchy to the designated HIS.
IMPORTANT • When HIS download is executed, trend acquisition will be reset and the previously sampled trend data may be lost. So that save the trend samples before downloading. SEE ALSO For details on trend data saving, see the following: E4.2.1, “Components of Trend Window”
• When running HIS downloading right before the processes of hour-closing (closed at each hour sharp), the trend data maybe excluded from the hour-closing processes. Thus, it is necessary to run HIS downloading at least three minutes before or after the time of hour-closing processes are performed.
When an HIS folder is selected, it is downloaded to the selected HIS. When windows are selected, they are downloaded to the selected HIS window by window.
■ Download Tag List When [Download FCS Taglist] is selected on the [Load] menu, a dialog box for selecting the station, source of tag list, and the HIS, destination station of tag list, appears. More than one tag list source station or destination station can be selected. By clicking the [Equalize] button on the dialog box, the FCS tag list may be downloaded to the HIS. When a BCV is selected to be the source of tag list, the tag list of the control stations connected to the BCV is downloaded to HIS too. Furthermore, the tag list of upper or lower gateways specified in the BCV may also be downloaded to the HIS.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-31
■ Status Display File Download When [Status Display File Download] is selected from the [Load] menu while a status display file is selected, a dialog box for selecting the download destination station will appear. Clicking [OK] button after selecting a station will prompt a confirmation message box for downloading. Clicking [OK] button on the message box may download the Status Display File to the selected station. Vary with different ways of selecting the Status Display Files for downloading, the following files may be downloaded accordingly. • Selecting and then downloading the DISPLAY folder All of the selected status display files (control drawing status display files, and logic chart status display files) will be downloaded to the specified station. • Selecting and then downloading the LOGICCHART folder All of the logic chart status display files will be downloaded to the specified station. • Selecting the status display files in the data list and then downloading them Selecting the DISPLAY folder or LOGICCHART folder will display in the data list area a list of the status display files of the selected folder. If a single (or multiple) status display file(s) displayed in the data list is selected and then downloaded, only the selected status display file(s) will be downloaded to the specified station. Note that the control drawing status display files and logic chart status display files cannot be selected simultaneously.
■ Offline Download to BCV When [Offline Download to BCV] is selected on the [Load] menu while a BCV folder is selected, a confirmation message box for confirming BCV downloading will appear. Clicking [OK] button in the message box may perform off-line download to BCV. For BCV-H or BCV-L, the database transmitted to the BCV contains a tag list. The BCV starts immediately after the off-line download is completed. The tag list of the Control Units and the Control Stations on the Control Bus, configured as lower level of the network, will be downloaded to all HISs, UHMISs (Unified Operation/ Monitoring stations) and HP9000 computers.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-32
■ Download Tag-List/Gateway Information When [Download Tag-List/Gateway Information] is selected on the [Load] menu while a station is selected, a dialog box for confirmation appears. Clicking the [OK] button may start downloading the tag list and gateway information. The tag list will be downloaded to all BCVs and all HISs, Unified Operation/Monitoring stations and HP9000 Computers, while the gateway information is downloaded to all HISs, UHMISs (Unified Operation/Monitoring stations) and HP9000 Computers.
■ Save BCV Operation Mark When [Save BCV Operation Mark] is clicked on [Load] menu while a BCV-H or a BCV-L folder is selected, a confirmation dialog box for Saving BCV operation marks will appear. Clicking [OK] buttons in the dialog box may start saving the BCV operation marks.
■ Download to CGW When [CGW Download] is selected from the [Load] menu while a CGW folder is selected, a message box for confirming CGW download will appear. Clicking [OK] button in the message box may download the CGW database to the selected CGW. The CGW download is performed via the control bus, not Ethernet.
■ Common Block Download (*1) Select [Common Block Download] from the [Load] menu while a common block folder or common block file is selected in the System View. A Common Block confirmation message box will appear. Clicking [OK] button in the message box. The common block will be downloaded to all stations defined as the server for the selected recipe group. *1:
The [Common block download] task bar may be selected only when Batch Management is installed.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-33
F1.1.6 Project Menu of System View The [Project] menu of System View is explained in this section.
■ Open Project The existing user-defined projects are displayed in System View. When [Open Project] is selected from the [Project] menu, the open project dialog box is called up. The project to be opened may be selected in the open project dialog box. The current project is always displayed in the System View.
IMPORTANT Do not drag & drop in the folder list display section of the open project dialog box. Dragging & dropping may damage the engineering data.
■ Close Project The selected user-defined project is closed from System View. The closed project will no longer be displayed in System View so that the project can not be removed. However, if the builder file of the project is being used, the project can not be closed. Also, the current project and the default project can not be closed.
■ Resolve Invalid Element Click this task bar may repair or recompile the files to resolve the invalid elements. If the project is not a current project, the files required from the project common part will be taken to repair the FCS download files.
IMPORTANT During the virtual test, the file will not be sent to FCS even after Resolving Invalid Elements is performed.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-34
F1.1.7 FCS Menu of System View The [FCS] menu of System View is explained in this section.
■ Error Check When [Error Check] from the [FCS] menu is selected while an FCS folder is selected, the consistency of the engineering data of the selected FCS (duplicate tag name definitions and block connection information) are checked. The check results are displayed in the message display area.
■ Resource Information When [Resource information] is selected from the [FCS] menu, the resource information dialog box is displayed. In the resource information dialog box, the numbers of different types of function blocks used by the FCS and the common items of the station are displayed.
■ Test Function There are two types of tests: virtual test and target test. When [Test Function] is selected from the [FCS] menu while an FCS folder is selected, either virtual test or target test is started depending on the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs. The conditions for starting each of these test is given below: • If the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs is current project, the target test may be performed. • If the attribute of the project to which the selected FCS belongs is user defined project or a default project, the virtual test may be performed.
■ All Generation When [All Generation] is selected from the [FCS] menu while the FCS folder is being selected, the all generation dialog box will be displayed. Generation of multiple FCS-related builder files can be performed by a single operation in the all generation dialog box. SEE ALSO For more information on all generation, see the following: F15, “All Generation”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-35
F1.1.8 HIS Menu of System View The [HIS] menu of System View is explained.
■ Virtual HIS When [Virtual HIS] is selected from the [HIS] menu while the HIS folder is being selected, a dialog to change the HIS to a virtual mode will be displayed. SEE ALSO For more information on how to start the virtual HIS, see the following: D2.2, “Starting and Ending the Virtual HIS in a Standalone Mode” in the Engineering Test Guide (IM 33S04N10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-36
F1.1.9 Help Menu of System View The [Help] menu of System View is explained in this section.
■ Using On-Line Manual “Using Online Manual” is displayed.
■ Engineering Tutorial Engineering Tutorial (IM 33S04H10-01E) is displayed.
■ Builder Definition Items The builder definition item list of System View is displayed.
■ Reference Index The index of the Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E) is displayed.
■ Version Information This menu item starts the software configuration viewer. The software configuration viewer displays the installed engineering function software and its version information.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-37
F1.2 Creating a New Project Create a project, which is the basic unit of the engineering database management.
■ Projects A project is a unit manages the database of the FCS and the HIS created by the user. All builder files defined by various builders are managed under the project.
IMPORTANT Make sure to use the same package revision for each of the PCs if you want to engineer the same project on several PCs.
System View (CS 1000) -MYPJT File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help a z All Folders SYSTEM VIEW -
Opened Folders : MYPJT Name Type
87
Modified Date
MYPJT COMMON + BATCH FCS0101 +
CONFIGURATION SEQ-LIBRARY IOM SWITCH MESSAGE
+
-
FUNCTION-BLOCK DISPLAY APPLICATION
HIS0124 CONFIGURATION + WINDOW HELP
2 stations F010201E.EPS
Figure Project Architecture
There are three types of project; the default project, the current project and the userdefined project. The project attribute (default, current, and user-defined) may be changed using the Project Attribute Change Utility. SEE ALSO For details on project attribute change, see the following: F1.3, “Project’s Attribution Utility”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-38
● Default Project After installation of the system, the project created the first time when the System View starts is referred to as the default project. The characteristics of the default project are as follows: • This project is downloadable to the FCS. • The virtual test with the FCS simulator can be performed for this project. • This project is downloadable to the HIS. • This project is downloadable off-line to the FCS of the target system.
● Current Project When any one of the FCS’s created in a default project is successfully downloaded, the attribute of the project changes from the default project to a current project. Online engineering becomes enabled. The current project can perform the target test using the Test Function. The characteristics of the current project are as follows: • Multiple current projects cannot be created. • The target test can be performed for this project. • This project is downloadable to the HIS. • This project is downloadable to the FCS of the target system. Each builder file defined by the various builders are written onto the hard disk when downloading to the FCS or HIS is completed normally. With the current project, the data on the hard disk always matches the data on the FCS or HIS.
● User-Defined Project A project copied either from the default project or from the current project is referred to as a user-defined project. This project cannot be downloaded to the FCS. This project is used when engineering using virtual tests or making a backup copy of the current project. The characteristics of the user-defined project are as follows: • Multiple user-defined projects can be created in System View. • The virtual test with the FCS simulator can be performed for this project. • This project is not downloadable to the FCS or HIS of the target system.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-39
■ Project Management A project is created when System View is executed for the first time after the builders are installed. The project created has the attribute of “the default project” at this stage. Once this project is downloaded to the FCS of the target system, the project’s attribute is changed from “the default project” to the current project. System View (CS 1000) File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help a z
Current object
All Folders SYSTEM VIEW MYPJT
User defined project
+ + + + +
Opened Folders: Name
87
Type
Modified Date
COMMON BATCH FCS0101 HIS0124 PJT01 COMMON FCS0101 HIS0124
Ready F010202E.EPS
Figure Project Types
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-40
■ Outline of Project ▼ Software Information, Project Information
When creating a project, the outline dialog box appears, the project outline information may be input.
● Software Information The software information area displays the user name and the company name registered when the software was installed. The registration may be modified in this dialog box. But the model cannot be changed.
● Project Information The project information area allows the project creator to enter arbitrary characters. Enter information on the process and the person in charge of DCS to manage the project. • Process: Production type, plant name/ equipment name • Person in charge of DCS: Company name/ organization name, department responsible, person in charge, date of creation, scope of responsibility Outline Enter Project Information CS1000 Software Information Model :
CS 1000
User :
CS1000
Company :
YOKOGAWA
Project Information Process: Yokogawa Tokyo Factory Distillation process Manufactory equipment for products Interma Person in charge of DCS: Yokogawa Head Off Engineering Department Mr. Yokogawa Jan. 15 1998 HIS, FCS Graphics are user's responsibility
OK
Cancel F010203E.EPS
Figure Project Information
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-41
■ Project Name and Position ¡ £ ▼ Project, Position, Project Comment, Alias of Project
After creating a new project, a menu box for the outline of the project, the project name and project location will be displayed in Create New Project dialog box. Project name is an alphanumeric character string less than 8 characters. The first character of the project name must be an alphabet. The project is managed according to this project name. The comment within 32 alphanumeric characters or 16 double-byte characters may be entered as the project description. Moreover, an alias can be created for a project. An alias of project can be defined with 8 alphanumeric characters. The project position is the project folder’s location in the hard disk. The default location in which to store the project is shown below. If more than one hard disk exist, the storage drive may be specified accordingly such as D:. • C:\CS1000\ENG\BkProject\ (*1) • C:\CS3000\ENG\BkProject\ (*2) *1: *2:
¡ The default location in the CS 1000. £ The default location in the CS 3000.
Create New Project Name and Position
Outline Constant Detailed Setting
Project
MYPJT
Position C:\CS1000\eng\BkProject\
Browse...
Project Comment
Alias of Project
OK
Cancel F010204E.EPS
Figure Project Properties (Name and Position)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-42
■ Domain Number and Control Bus Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡ A domain number and the control bus dual-redundant configuration may be set on the [Constant] tab when creating a new project. Create New Project Name and Position
Outline Constant Detailed Setting
Domain Number
1
Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant
OK
Cancel F010205E.EPS
Figure Constant Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box ¡
● Default Domain Number ¡ ▼ Domain Number
A default domain number may be displayed when creating a new project. Set this number for domain number. A domain number is used to identify each domain in a network. The domain number may be set in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.
● Control Bus Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡ ▼ Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant
The user can specify whether to duplicate the VL net to improve the reliability of a system. If the VL net is in dual-redundant configuration, when one of the two buses fails or in troubles, the communication can continue by the other bus. When the VL net is in dual-redundant configuration, the bus 1 and bus 2 carry out the communication alternately in normal situations.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-43
■ Setting Domain Number £ A domain number may be set on the Constant tab when creating a new project. Create New Project Name and Position
Outline Constant Detailed Setting
Domain Number
1
OK
Cancel F010206E.EPS
Figure Constant Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box £
● Default Domain Number £ ▼ Domain Number
A default domain number may be displayed when creating a new project. Set this number for domain number. A domain number is used to identify each domain in a network. The domain number may be set in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set. Note that every time a new FCS or HIS is created, a domain number can be set for the station.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-44
■ Detailed Setting of Project On the [Detailed Setting] tab of [Create New Project] dialog box, the options for [Manually Register Engineering Unit] and [Manually Register Switch Position Label] can be set. Create New Project Name and Position
Outline Constant Detailed Setting
Manually Register Engineering Unit Symbol Manually Register Switch Position Label Plant Hierarchy 1
Start Number Maximum Number of use Number of use (Number of Custom facilities)
32767 1000 (1000)
Display FF-PID in same style as PID.(Use P.I.D instead of GAIN. RESET. RATE)
OK
Cancel F010207E.EPS
Figure Detailed Setting Tab in Create New Project Dialog Box
● Manually Register Engineering Unit ▼ Manually Register Engineering Unit Symbol
To manually register the engineering unit can be specified. • When the option is checked, an engineering unit needs to be manually registered on Engineering Unit Symbol Builder. However, an unregistered engineering unit can not be used. • When the option is not checked, an engineering unit will be automatically registered. The Engineering Unit Symbol Builder will be in Read mode. In Read mode, the Engineering Unit Symbol Builder can read the engineering units entered on Function Block Detail Builder or other builders and add them to the registration.
● Manually Register Switch Position Label ▼ Manually Register Switch Position Label
To manually register the switch position label can be specified. • When the option is checked, a switch position label needs to be manually registered on Switch Position Label Builder. However, an unregistered switch position label can not be used. • When the option is not checked, a switch position label will be automatically registered. The Switch Position Label Builder will be in Auto mode. In Auto mode, the Switch Position Label Builder can read the switch position labels entered on Function Block Detail Builder or other builders and add them to the registration.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-45
● Plant Hierarchy ▼ Start Number, Maximum Number of Use
This is used when a project has a CENTUM CS system at the upper level and a CS1000 or CS 3000 system at the lower level. • Start Number The start number for Plant Hierarchy can be defined between 1 and 32767. Since the numbers 1 to 4096 are reserved for CENTUM CS, a number greater than or equal to 4097 should be used for CS 1000 or CS 3000. • Maximum Number of Use Maximum number of plant hierarchies can be set between 1 and 32767. Number of in Use (Number of Custom Facilities) This indicates the number of plant hierarchies that are running in the project. Number of Custom Facilities means the number of plant hierarchies built in Plant Hierarchy Builder.
● FF Mode/CENTUM Mode £ The parameters for proportional gain, integral reset and derivative rate are indicated as GAIN, RESET and RATE for FF-PID function block while for CENTUM PID blocks, they are represented by P, I and D respectively. To display the FF-PID block in the same style as the CENTUM function block, the option [Display FF-PID in same style as PID, (Use P.I.D instead of GAIN, RESET, RATE)] needs to be checked. This option is valid for the whole project. By default, this option is not checked. The change of this option will become valid after the off-line downloading to the FCS is performed. SEE ALSO For more information about FF Mode/CENTUM Mode, see the following: “■ Switching the Data Item Names of FF-PID Blocks” in D1.6, “Other Engineering Items” in FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-46
F1.3 Project’s Attribution Utility To change attribute of a project, or to register a project created from other PC on System View, Project’s Attribution Utility can be used. Moreover, the project registered on System View can be removed using Project’s Attribution Utility.
IMPORTANT • Before starting Project’s Attribution Utility, it is necessary to confirm that System View is not opened by another PC in the project. • If a project is being used by a different user, using Project Attribution Utility to change the project may cause errors in the project. So that it is important to make sure that the project is not being used by other users before changing the project with Project Attribution Utility. • When using Project Attribution Utility to modify a current project, offline download may be required for the running field control stations. • A project can be removed or can be registered on System View. They can be performed using the [Project] menu on System View.
■ Outline of Project’s Attribution Utility The Project’s Attribution Utility is an engineering tool that makes it convenient to register a project created from other PC, to change a project’s properties or to remove the registration of a project.
● Registering a Project Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, a newly created project can be registered in System View. For instance, when a project is created on an HIS other than the HIS for the existing system, the Project’s Attribution Utility can be used to register the newly created project. The attribute of the project can be set during registration, by choosing from Current Project, Default Project and User Defined Project.
● Changing the Attribute of a Project Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, the attribute of a project (Default Project, Current Project and User Defined Project) can be changed.
● Remove Registration of a Project Using the Project’s Attribution Utility, projects that have been registered in System View can be removed. For instance, when the number of projects registered in System View has reached the limit, projects that will not be used in upcoming operations can be removed temporality from System View, using the Project’s Attribution Utility. Note removing a project means to delete the registered information of the project from the System View, the project itself will not be deleted. The project can be registered again by clicking Registration button of Project’s Attribution Utility, or choose [Project] - [Open Project...] task bar on System View.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-47
■ Notes on the Project Attribute Change Utility Be careful about the following when using the Project Attribute Change Utility: • Before using the Project Attribute Change Utility, check that System View is not running. If it is running, the Project Attribute Change Utility cannot run. • Only one project can exist as the default project or current project in System View. Therefore, if a project having the same attribute already exists, first change the attribute of that project to user-defined project before setting the attribute of the new project to default project or current project.
■ Running the Project Attribute Change Utility 1.
Before running the Project Attribute Change Utility, check that System View is not running. When performing engineering on multiple PCs, check that the System Views is not running on these PCs, either.
TIP When staring Project Attribution Utility while the System View is running, a warning message appears. In this case, close the System View first then start Project Attribution Utility.
2.
Click [Programs] from Windows’s Start menu, then click [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] and [Project’s Attribution Utility]. Then a confirmation dialog box as shown below will open.
Utility To Change Project’s Attribution Do not use this utility program for a project shared by multiple users. A fatal error may occur. Before changing the project contents, make sure that no other users are accessing the project. OK
Cancel
F010305E.EPS
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box when Starting Project Attribution Utility
3.
Click [OK] on the dialog box, the utility starts running, the dialog box of “Utility to Change Project’s Attribute” displays. Utility To Change Project’s Attribution Projects Project Name
Location
Project Attribute
MYPJT
D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT
Current Project
PJT01
D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\PJT01
User Defined Project
PJT02
D:\CS1000\eng\BKProject\PJT02
User Defined Project
Registration
Changing
Deleting
Exit
F010301E.EPS
Figure Utility To Change Project’s Attribution Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-48
■ Quitting the Project Attribute Change Utility To quit the Project Attribute Change Utility, click [Exit] in the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.
■ Registering a Project Follow the procedure below to register a new project and set the attribute of that project. 1.
In the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, click [Registration]. The Registration Of Projects dialog box then appears.
Resistration Of Projects Location
BKProject
MYPJT PJT01 PJT02
OK
Project Name
Cancel
Project Attribute Default Project
Current Project
User Defined Project F010302E.EPS
Figure Registration Of Projects Dialog Box
2.
In the list box, select the folder of the project you want to register. The project name of the folder you selected in the list box is displayed in the [Project Name] box immediately below.
3.
Under [Project Attribute], set the project attribute; select [Default Project], [Current Project], or [User Defined Project].
TIP If you select Default Project or Current Project and click OK but the registered default or current project already exists, a warning dialog box appears.
4.
Click [OK]. The utility program then registers the project and updates the Projects list in the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-49
■ Changing the Attribute of a Project Follow the procedure below to change the attribute of a project. 1.
In the [Projects] list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, select the project whose attribute you want to change.
2.
Click [Changing]. The Changing Attribute Of Projects dialog box (shown below) then opens.
Changing Atrribute Of Projects
Projects MYPJT
Attribute Of Projects Default Project Current Project User Defined Project
Apply
Cancel F010303E.EPS
Figure Changing Attribute Of Projects Dialog Box
3.
Under [Attribute Of Projects] (the present attribute of the selected project is unavailable), select the new attribute to be given to the selected project.
TIP If you select Default Project or Current Project and click [Apply] but the registered default or current project already exists, a warning dialog box appears.
4.
Click [Apply]. The utility program then changes the attribute and updates the project attribute indication in the Projects list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-50
■ Deleting a Project Follow the procedure below to delete a project. 1.
In the [Projects] list box of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box, select the project you want to delete.
2.
Click [Deleting]. The Deleting Of Projects dialog box (shown below) then opens.
Deleting Of Projects
Delete Projects PJT02
Apply
Cancel F010304E.EPS
Figure Deleting Of Projects Dialog Box
3.
In the Deleting Of Projects dialog box, click [Apply]. The utility program then deletes the project and updates the Projects list of the Utility To Change Project’s Attribution dialog box.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-51
F1.4 Project Devices Configuration The devices applied in a project need to be configured. Click the [Create New...] on the [File] menu of System View, and a device comprising the project may be selected. Selecting a device, may pop up the Create New dialog box. On this dialog box, the station type and network address of the selected device may be defined.
■ Project Devices ¡ The devices that comprise a project are shown as follows. • FCS • HIS • BCV • CGW • Station (*1) *1:
“Station” refers to stations of a system connected with BCV other than CS 1000 stations such as HIS, FCS, BCV, CGW or etc. For example UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) or a control unit of XL series products can be configured in this category.
Both Ethernet and VL net may be used for the communication among the devices such as HISs, FCSs and other devices. VL net is used in the communication of the process data, message exchange and control signals. On one VL net, up to 8 HISs and 16 FCSs may be configured. Ethernet is used to transmit engineering data defined by the various builders to HIS and to communicate with the supervisory computers. Note that the Ethernet is not indispensable for a project. When Ethernet is absent, equalization communication with the HIS is performed via the VL net. HIS
Ethernet
HIS CGW
PFCS
VL net
PFCS BCV
RL bus
MFCU Station
MFCU Station F010401E.EPS
Figure An Example of System Configuration ¡
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-01
F1-52
■ Project Devices £ The devices that may be configured in a project are shown as follows. • FCS • HIS • BCV • CGW • SCS (*1) • Station (*2) *1: *2:
SCS stands for ProSafe-RS Safety Control Station. “Station” refers to stations of a system connected with BCV other than CS 3000 stations such as HIS, FCS, BCV, CGW, SCS or etc. For example, UHMIS (Unified Operation/Monitoring Station) or a station of XL series products can be configured in this category.
Both Ethernet and V net may be used for the communication among the devices such as HISs, FCSs and other devices. V net is used in the communication of the process data, message exchange and control signals. On each domain of V net, up to 16 HISs and 48 FCSs may be configured. Ethernet is used to transmit engineering data defined by various builders to HIS and to communicate with the supervisory computers. Under the following circumstances, Ethernet connections are necessary. • More than two domains; • More than 1000 graphic windows; • More than 8 trend blocks; • Connecting to a station through Ethernet interface; APCS, GSGW, HIS-TSE, CGW and SCS stations can be connected through the Ethernet interfaces. • More than 8000 tags for monitoring in one project. • More than 9 HISs are connected in one project. HIS
Ethernet
HIS CGW
V net KFCS
LFCS
SFCS
BCV
V net
F010402E.EPS
Figure An Example of System Configuration £
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-53
F1.4.1 Creating a New FCS In the dialog box for creating a new FCS, the following items need to be defined.
■ Station Type ¡ £ ▼ Station Type
FCS station type may be specified.
● FCS Station Type ¡ There are four station types for FCS shown as follows. • PFCS-S Field Control Station (Standard Type) • PFCD-S Duplexed Field Control Station (Standard Type) • PFCS-E Field Control Station (Enhanced Type) • PFCD-E Duplexed Field Control Station (Enhanced Type)
● FCS Station Type £ There are eleven categories for FCS stations; PFCS, SFCS, LFCS, LFCS2, KFCS, KFCS2, FFCS, RFCS2, RFCS5, APCS and GSGW. PFCS consists of the following four types: • PFCS-S Field Control Station (Standard Type) • PFCD-S Duplexed Field Control Station (Standard Type) • PFCS-E Field Control Station (Enhanced Type) • PFCD-E Duplexed Field Control Station (Enhanced Type) SFCS consists of the following two types: • PFCS-H Field Control Station (Compact Type) • PFCD-H Duplexed Field Control Station (Compact Type) LFCS consists of the following four types: • AFS10S Field Control Unit (for RIO, Rack Mountable) • AFS10D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, Rack Mountable) • AFS20S Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet) • AFS20D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, with Cabinet) LFCS2 consists of the following four types: • AFG10S Field Control Unit (RIO, Rack Mountable) • AFG10D Duplexed Field Control Unit (RIO, Rack Mountable) • AFG20S Field Control Unit (RIO, Cabinet) • AFG20D Duplexed Field Control Unit (RIO, Cabinet) KFCS consists of the following four types: • AFS30S Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable) • AFS30D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable) • AFS40S Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet) • AFS40D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet) IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-54
KFCS2 consists of the following four station types: • AFG30S Field Control Unit (FIO, Rack Mountable) • AFG30D Duplexed Field Control Unit (FIO, Rack Mountable) • AFG40S Field Control Unit (FIO, Cabinet) • AFG40D Duplexed Field Control Unit (FIO, Cabinet) FFCS consists of the following two station types: • AFF50S Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable) • AFF50D Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable) RFCS2 consists of the following eight types: • AFS81S Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration type) • AFS81D Duplexed Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration type) • AFS82S Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type) • AFS82D Duplexed Field Control Station (for SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type) • AFS83S Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM V Migration type) • AFS83D Duplexed Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM V Migration type) • AFS84S Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type) • AFS84D Duplexed Field Control Station (for FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration type) RFCS5 consists of the following eight station types: • AFG81S Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type) • AFG81D Duplexed Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type) • AFG82S Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type) • AFG82D Duplexed Field Control Station (SIO/FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type) • AFG83S Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type) • AFG83D Duplexed Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM V Migration Type) • AFG84S Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type) • AFG84D Duplexed Field Control Station (FIO, CENTUM-XL Migration Type) APCS consists of the following type: • APCS Advanced Process Control Station GSGW consists of the following type: • GSGW Generic Subsystem Gateway SEE ALSO • For more information about RFCS2 and RFCS5, see the following: Migrated-FCS (FIO) (IM 33Q01B41-01E) • For more information about APCS, see the following: APCS (IM 33Q03M10-01E) • For more information about GSGW, see the following: PART-Q Generic Subsystem Gateway
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-55
■ Power Supply Unit in Dual-Redundant Configuration ¡ £ ▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply
Specify if the dual configuration is required for power supply unit
● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit ¡ For the field control station with single CPU card (PFCS-S/PFCS-E), the power supply unit may be defined to either dual-redundant or non-redundant configuration. For the duplexed field control station (PFCD-S/PFCD-E), the power supply unit is fixed to dual-redundant configuration, cannot be redefined.
● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit : PFCS/SFCS £ For the field control station with single CPU card (PFCS-S/PFCS-E/PFCS-H), the power supply unit may be defined to either dual-redundant or non-redundant configuration. For the duplexed field control station (PFCD-S/PFCD-E/PFCD-H), the power supply unit is fixed to dual-redundant configuration, cannot be redefined.
● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit : KFCS2/KFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £ For KFCS2, KFCS, LFCS2 and LFCS, the power supply unit is fixed to dual-redundant configuration, cannot be redefined.
● Dual Configuration of Power Supply Unit : FFCS £ For the field control unit with single CPU card (AFF50S), the power supply unit may be defined to either dual-redundant or non-redundant configuration. For the duplexed field control unit (AFF50D), the power supply unit is fixed to dual-redundant configuration, cannot be redefined.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-56
■ Define Database Type ¡ ▼ Database Type
The database type for the FCS is decided according to the control system configured for the FCS. The different type of database handles different numbers of function blocks.
IMPORTANT Once a database type is defined, the database type can not be changed.
The types of function blocks and the model names of function blocks corresponding to various types are shown as follows. Table Function Block Models ¡ Block type
Function block models
Regulatory control/ Calculation
PVI, PVI-DV PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STC ONOFF-E(*1), ONOFF-GE(*1) MLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E(*1), MC-3E(*1) RATIO, PG-L13, BSETU-2, BSETU-3 VELLIM SS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUAL FOUT, FFSUM, XCPL, SPLIT PTC ADD, MUL, DIV, AVE SQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-C AVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2 SW-33, SW-91, DSW-16, DSW-16C, DSET, DSET-PVI SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD
Sequence
ST16, ST16E, LC64 SI-1, SI-2, SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22P SI-1E(*1), SI-2E(*1), SO-1E(*1), SO-2E(*1), SIO-11E(*1), SIO-12E(*1), SIO-21E(*1), SIO-22E(*1), SIO-12PE(*1), SIO-22PE(*1) TM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO
Switch Instruments/ Sequence Elements General-purpose calculations
CALCU, CALCU-C
Faceplate/Others
INDST2, INDST2S, INDST3, PBS5C, BSI, HAS3C BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDSET-2L, BDSET-2C, BDA-L, BDA-C ALM-R, RL, RS, VLVM
SFC blocks
_SFCSW, _SFCPB, _SFCAS
Operation
OPSBL, OPSFC OPSFCP1, OPSFCP2, OPSFCP3, OPSFCP4, OPSFCP5
Unit Instruments
_UTSW, _UTPB, _UTAS _UTSW-N, _UTPB-N, _UTAS-N F010403E.EPS
*1:
The function blocks can be applied only in enhanced type PFCS (PFCS-E/PFCD-E).
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-57
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Standard Type PFCS ¡ The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS (PFCS-S) Field Control Station as well as the PFCD (PFCD-S) Duplexed Field Control Station: Table Standard Type FCS Database Types ¡ Regulatory SEQ Regulatory Control Monitoring Monitoring Standard
SEQ Control Standard (Medium Sequence Capacity)
SEQ Control Standard General(Large Purpose Sequence Capacity)
Element for each station (*1)
500
500
500
500
500
500
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
0
0
0
0
0
0
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Operator Guide message
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
50
50
250
500
50
100
50
80
50
30
30
80
120
80
120
40
500
400
300
400
General-purpose Calculations
50
10
10
50
30
80
Faceplate / Others
20
30
30
50
40
20
SFC block
5
5
5
5
5
5
Operation
0
0
0
0
0
0
Control Drawing Regulatory control / Calculation Sequence Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
Unit Instrument
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
128
128
128
128
128
128
ADL
160
160
160
160
160
160
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEBOL User Function Recipe Area
0
0
0
0
User C Area
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte 64 Kbyte F010404E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-58
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Enhanced Type PFCS ¡ The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS (PFCS-E) Field Control Station (Enhanced type) as well as the PFCD (PFCD-E) Field Control Station (Enhanced type): Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (1/3) ¡ Regulatory Control Enhanced (Loaded C programing language)
Small-Sized Unit Control (Loaded C programing language)
Small-Sized Unit Control
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
Node Common Switch Global Switch
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
50
50
50
250
80
80
50
80
80
120
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
50
80
80
Faceplate / Others
20
20
20
SFC block
10
5
5
Operation
0
30
30
Unit Instrument
0
2
2
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
ADL
160
160
160
SEBOL User Function
0
40
40
Recipe Area
0
0
0
User C Area
500 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
Communication I/O
Control Drawing Regulatory control / Calculation Sequence Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
F010405E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-59
Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (2/3) ¡
SEQ Control Enhanced (Large Sequence Capacity)
SEQ Control SEQ Control Enhanced Standard (Large (Large Sequence Sequence Capacity/ Capacity/ Loaded Loaded C programing C programing language) language)
SEQ Control SEQ Control Enhanced SEQ Control Standard (Medium Enhanced (Medium Sequence (Medium Sequence Capacity/ Capacity/ Sequence Loaded Loaded Capacity) with C programing Recipe C programing language) with language) Recipe
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Node Common Switch Global Switch
256
256
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Communication I/O
Printing Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Control Drawing
50
50
50
50
50
50
Regulatory control / Calculation
50
50
50
100
100
100
Sequence
120
120
120
80
80
80
Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
300
300
300
400
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
30
30
30
50
50
50
Faceplate / Others
40
40
40
50
50
50
SFC block
10
10
10
10
10
10
Operation
100
0
100
100
0
100
10
0
10
10
0
10
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
256
256
ADL
160
160
160
160
160
160
40
40
40
40
40
40
Unit Instrument
SEBOL User Function Recipe Area
0
0
0
1 Mbyte
0
1 Mbyte
User C Area
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte F010406E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-60
Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (3/3) ¡ Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) (*3)
Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) (*3)
General (Calculation Oriented) Element for each station (*1)
2000
2500
2500
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
Control Drawing
50
50
50
Regulatory control / Calculation
80
100
100
Sequence
80
50
120
Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
400
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
200
80
80
20
50
120
SFC block
5
10
10
Operation
30
120
100
Faceplate / Others
2
15
10
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
ADL
160
64
64
40
40
20
Recipe Area
0
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
User C Area
500 Kbyte
350 Kbyte
350 Kbyte
Unit Instrument
SEBOL User Function
F010415E.EPS
*1: *2: *3:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). In the databases of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) and Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) types, the operation blocks are counted as SFC blocks. In the database of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented) type, since the area for SEBOL programming and the area for running the SEBOL programs are expanded, SEBOL oriented engineering becomes possible. The assignment of the areas are as follows. • Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 150 blocks In other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for SEBOL programming, the size is expanded. • Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 100 blocks In other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for sequence tables, the size is shrunken.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F1-61
■ Define Database Type £ ▼ Database Type
The database type for the FCS is decided according to the control system configured for the FCS. The different type of database handles different numbers of function blocks.
IMPORTANT Once a database type is defined, the database type can not be changed.
The function blocks can be applied in PFCS are shown as follows: Table List of PFCS Function Blocks: PFCS £ Block type
Function block models
Regulatory control/ Calculation
PVI, PVI-DV PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STC ONOFF-E(*1), ONOFF-GE(*1) MLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E(*1), MC-3E(*1) RATIO, PG-L13, BSETU-2, BSETU-3 VELLIM SS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUAL FOUT, FFSUM, XCPL, SPLIT PTC ADD, MUL, DIV, AVE SQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-C AVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2 SW-33, SW-91, DSW-16, DSW-16C, DSET, DSET-PVI SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD
Sequence
ST16, ST16E, LC64 SI-1, SI-2, SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22P SI-1E(*1), SI-2E(*1), SO-1E(*1), SO-2E(*1), SIO-11E(*1), SIO-12E(*1), SIO-21E(*1), SIO-22E(*1), SIO-12PE(*1), SIO-22PE(*1) TM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO
Switch Instruments/ Sequence Elements General-purpose calculations
CALCU, CALCU-C
Faceplate/Others
INDST2, INDST2S, INDST3, PBS5C, BSI, HAS3C BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDSET-2L, BDSET-2C, BDA-L, BDA-C ALM-R, RL, RS, VLVM
SFC blocks
_SFCSW, _SFCPB, _SFCAS
Operation
OPSBL, OPSFC OPSFCP1, OPSFCP2, OPSFCP3, OPSFCP4, OPSFCP5
Unit Instruments
_UTSW, _UTPB, _UTAS _UTSW-N, _UTPB-N, _UTAS-N F010403E.EPS
*1:
£ The function blocks can be applied only in enhanced type PFCS (PFCS-E/PFCD-E).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-62
The function blocks can be applied in the FCS other than PFCS are shown as follows: Table List of FCS (excluding PFCS) Function Blocks £ Block type
Function block models
Regulatory control/ Calculation
PVI, PVI-DV PID, PI-HLD, PID-BSW, ONOFF, ONOFF-G, PID-TP, PD-MR, PI-BLEND, PID-STC ONOFF-E, ONOFF-GE MLD, MLD-PVI, MLD-SW, MC-2, MC-3, MC-2E, MC-3E RATIO, PG-L13, BSETU-2, BSETU-3 VELLIM SS-H, SS-M, SS-L, AS-H, AS-M, AS-L, SS-DUAL FOUT, FFSUM, XCPL, SPLIT PTC ADD, MUL, DIV, AVE SQRT, EXP, LAG, INTEG, LD, RAMP, LDLAG, DLAY, DLAY-C AVE-M, AVE-C, FUNC-VAR, TPCFL, ASTM1, ASTM2 SW-33, SW-91, DSW-16, DSW-16C, DSET, DSET-PVI SLCD, SLPC, SLMC, SMST-111, SMST-121, SMRT, SBSD, SLBC, SLCC, STLD FF-AI(*1), FF-DI(*1), FF-CS(*1), FF-PID(*1), FF-RA(*1), FF-AO(*1), FF-DO(*1), FF-OS(*1), FF-SC(*1), FF-IT(*1), FF-IS(*1), FF-MDI(*1), FF-MDO(*1), FF-MAI(*1), FF-MAO(*1), FF-SUNV(*1)
Sequence
ST16, ST16E, LC64
Sequence (M-size)(*2)
M_ST16, M_ST16E
Sequence (L-size)(*2)
L_ST16, L_ST16E
Switch Instruments
SI-1, SI-2, SO-1, SO-2, SIO-11, SIO-12, SIO-21, SIO-22, SIO-12P, SIO-22P SI-1E, SI-2E, SO-1E, SO-2E, SIO-11E, SIO-12E, SIO-21E, SIO-22E, SIO-12PE, SIO-22PE
Sequence Elements 1
TM, CTS, CTP, CI, CO
General-purpose calculations
CALCU, CALCU-C
Faceplate blocks
INDST2, INDST2S, INDST3, PBS5C, PBS10C, BSI, HAS3C
Logic operation
AND, OR, NOT, SRS1-S, SRS1-R, SRS2-S, SRS2-R WOUT, OND, OFFD, TON, TOFF, GT, GE, EQ, BAND, BOR, BNOT
Sequence Elements 2
ALM-R, RL, RS, VLVM
Batch data
BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDSET-2L, BDSET-2C, BDA-L, BDA-C
SFC blocks
_SFCSW, _SFCPB, _SFCAS
Operation
OPSBL, OPSFC OPSFCP1, OPSFCP2, OPSFCP3, OPSFCP4, OPSFCP5
Unit Instruments
_UTSW, _UTPB, _UTAS _UTSW-N, _UTPB-N, _UTAS-N
Off-site block
FSBSET, BLEND F010407E.EPS
*1: *2:
£ The blocks only supported in KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, RFCS5, and RFCS2. £ The blocks only supported in RFCS5 and RFCS2. Even though the function block may appear on menu of builders in all types of FCS database, however, a generation error occurs except for RFCS5 and RFCS2.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-63
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Standard Type PFCS : PFCS £ The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS (PFCS-S) Field Control Station as well as the PFCD (PFCD-S) Duplexed Field Control Station: Table Standard Type FCS Database Types : PFCS £ Regulatory SEQ Regulatory Control Monitoring Monitoring Standard
SEQ Control Standard (Medium Sequence Capacity)
SEQ Control Standard General(Large Purpose Sequence Capacity)
Element for each station (*1)
500
500
500
500
500
500
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
0
0
0
0
0
0
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Operator Guide message
100
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
50
50
250
500
50
100
50
80
50
30
30
80
120
80
120
40
500
400
300
400
General-purpose Calculations
50
10
10
50
30
80
Faceplate / Others
20
30
30
50
40
20
SFC block
5
5
5
5
5
5
Operation
0
0
0
0
0
0
Control Drawing Regulatory control / Calculation Sequence Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
Unit Instrument
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
128
128
128
128
128
128
ADL
160
160
160
160
160
160
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEBOL User Function Recipe Area
0
0
0
0
User C Area
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte 64 Kbyte F010424E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-64
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the Enhanced Type PFCS : PFCS £ The following table lists the capacity of FCS database types for the PFCS (PFCS-E) Field Control Station (Enhanced type) as well as the PFCD (PFCD-E) Field Control Station (Enhanced type): Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (1/3) : PFCS £ Regulatory Control Enhanced (Loaded C programing language)
Small-Sized Unit Control (Loaded C programing language)
Small-Sized Unit Control
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
Node Common Switch Global Switch
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
50
50
50
250
80
80
50
80
80
120
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
50
80
80
Faceplate / Others
20
20
20
SFC block
10
5
5
Operation
0
30
30
Unit Instrument
0
2
2
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
ADL
160
160
160
SEBOL User Function
0
40
40
Recipe Area
0
0
0
User C Area
500 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
Communication I/O
Control Drawing Regulatory control / Calculation Sequence Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
F010425E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-65
Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (2/3) : PFCS £
SEQ Control Enhanced (Large Sequence Capacity)
SEQ Control SEQ Control Enhanced Standard (Large (Large Sequence Sequence Capacity/ Capacity/ Loaded Loaded C programing C programing language) language)
SEQ Control SEQ Control Enhanced SEQ Control Standard (Medium Enhanced (Medium Sequence (Medium Sequence Capacity/ Sequence Capacity/ Loaded Capacity) with Loaded C programing Recipe C programing language) with language) Recipe
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Node Common Switch Global Switch
256
256
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Communication I/O
Printing Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
100
100
100
Control Drawing
50
50
50
50
50
50
Regulatory control / Calculation
50
50
50
100
100
100
Sequence
120
120
120
80
80
80
Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
300
300
300
400
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
30
30
30
50
50
50
Faceplate / Others
40
40
40
50
50
50
SFC block
10
10
10
10
10
10
Operation
100
0
100
100
0
100
10
0
10
10
0
10
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
256
256
ADL
160
160
160
160
160
160
40
40
40
40
40
40
Unit Instrument
SEBOL User Function Recipe Area
0
0
0
1 Mbyte
0
1 Mbyte
User C Area
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte F010426E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-66
Table Enhanced Type FCS Database Types (3/3) : PFCS £ Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) (*3)
Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) (*3)
General (Calculation Oriented) Element for each station (*1)
2000
2500
2500
Function block/element for each area (*2)
1500
1500
1500
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
200
200
200
Batch Event Message
100
100
100
Printing Message
100
100
100
Operator Guide Message
100
100
100
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
Control Drawing
50
50
50
Regulatory control / Calculation
80
100
100
Sequence
80
50
120
Switch Instruments / Sequence Elements
400
400
400
General-purpose Calculations
200
80
80
20
50
120
SFC block
5
10
10
Operation
30
120
100
Faceplate / Others
2
15
10
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
ADL
160
64
64
40
40
20
Recipe Area
0
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
User C Area
500 Kbyte
350 Kbyte
350 Kbyte
Unit Instrument
SEBOL User Function
F010427E.EPS
*1: *2: *3:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). In the databases of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) and Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) types, the operation blocks are counted as SFC blocks. In the database of Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented) type, since the area for SEBOL programming and the area for running the SEBOL programs are expanded, SEBOL oriented engineering becomes possible. The assignment of the areas are as follows. • Batch Control (SEBOL Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 150 blocks In other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for SEBOL programming, the size is expanded. • Batch Control (Sequence Table Oriented with Recipe) : Area = 100 blocks In other type databases, the area is 120+10=130 blocks. For reserving the sufficient area for sequence tables, the size is shrunken.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-67
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the SFCS : SFCS £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the SFCS: Table FCS Database Types : SFCS £ Generalpurpose
Continuous monitoring
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
1
1
1
1
1
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
256
256
256
256
256
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
Sequence monitoring
Unit control (without Recipe)
Unit control (with Recipe)
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
200
Printing Message
200
200
200
200
200
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
200
Regulatory control / Calculation
250
1500
200
200
200
Sequence
150
60
60
120
80
Sequence (M-size)
0
0
0
0
0
Sequence (L-size)
0
0
0
0
0
Switch Instruments
250
150
1500
200
200
Sequence Elements 1
200
200
200
250
250
General-purpose Calculations
120
60
60
80
80
Faceplate
60
60
60
30
30
Logic operation
50
30
30
30
30
Sequence Elements 2
50
50
50
50
50
Batch Data
60
60
60
20
20
SFC block
10
0
0
10
10
Operation
0
0
0
150
150
Unit Supervision
0
0
0
20
20
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Offsite block Valve pattern monitor (VPM64) 1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
256
ADL
160
160
160
160
160
SEBOL daemon
10
0
0
80
80
FCS simultaneous execution
10
0
0
100
100
SEBOL user function
0
0
0
40
40
Recipe area
0
0
0
0
1 Mbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
500 Kbyte
Generalpurpose
Continuous monitoring
User C / Option area
Sequence monitoring
Unit control (without Recipe)
Unit control (with Recipe) F010408E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-68
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the LFCS : LFCS £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the LFCS: Table FCS Database Types (1/3) : LFCS £ GeneralPurpose GeneralContinuous Purpose (Large number Monitoring of elements)
Regulatory Control
Sequence Monitoring
Sequence Control (mainly by SFC Blocks)
Element for each station (*1)
2000
5800
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
8
8
8
8
8
8
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Node Common Switch
256
256
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
200
200
Regulatory control / Calculation
700
550
2000
300
800
300
Sequence
Global Switch Communication I/O
450
450
200
200
300
200
Sequence (M-size)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sequence (L-size)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch Instruments
450
450
450
2000
300
1000
Sequence Elements 1
600
600
450
600
600
600
General-purpose Calculations
400
450
200
200
550
200
Faceplate
200
50
200
200
200
200
Logic operation
150
150
150
150
100
150
Sequence Elements 2
150
150
150
150
150
150
Batch Data
200
200
200
200
300
50
SFC block
10
10
0
0
0
80
Operation
0
0
0
0
0
20
Unit Instruments
0
0
0
0
0
5
Offsite block
0
0
0
0
0
0
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
256
256
ADL
512
512
512
512
512
512
SEBOL daemon
10
10
0
0
0
40
SFC simultaneous execution
10
10
0
0
0
80
0
0
0
0
0
20
SEBOL user function Recipe area User C / Option area
0
0
0
0
0
0
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
GeneralPurpose GeneralContinuous Purpose (Large number Monitoring of elements)
Sequence Monitoring
Regulatory Control
Sequence Control (mainly by SFC Blocks) F010409E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-69
Table FCS Database Types (2/3) : LFCS £ Sequence Control (mainly by Sequence Blocks)
Unit Control (without Recipe)
Unit Control (with Recipe)
Offsite Block
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
2500
8
8
8
8
4000
4000
4000
4000
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
Regulatory control / Calculation
400
250
250
700
Sequence
600
250
200
350
0
0
0
0
Node Common Switch Global Switch Communication I/O
Sequence (M-size) Sequence (L-size)
0
0
0
0
1000
500
450
450
Sequence Elements 1
600
600
500
600
General-purpose Calculations
200
100
80
400
Faceplate
200
100
50
200
Logic operation
150
100
50
150
Sequence Elements 2
150
150
50
150
Batch Data
400
50
50
200
SFC block
10
10
10
10
Operation
0
250
200
0
Unit Instruments
0
35
30
0
Offsite block
0
0
0
80
Switch Instruments
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
ADL
512
128
64
512
SEBOL daemon
10
120
100
10
SFC simultaneous execution
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
10
150
150
10
SEBOL user function
0
70
70
0
Recipe area
0
0
1 Mbyte
0
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
128 Kbyte
User C / Option area
Sequence Control (mainly by Sequence Blocks)
Unit Control (without Recipe)
Unit Control (with Recipe)
Offsite Block
F010410E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-70
Table FCS Database Types (3/3) : LFCS £ Valve pattern monitor
Migration
Migration Type (with Expanded Sequence Table)
Sequence Control (with Expanded Sequence Block)
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
4000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
4000
8
8
8
8
4000
4000
4000
4000
Node Common Switch
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
Regulatory control / Calculation
250
300
300
500
Sequence
Global Switch Communication I/O
200
450
200
200
Sequence (M-size)
0
0
200
100
Sequence (L-size)
0
0
50
100
Switch Instruments
450
600
600
600
Sequence Elements 1
500
600
600
700
General-purpose Calculations
80
600
600
500
Faceplate
50
50
50
10
Logic operation
50
100
100
100
Sequence Elements 2
50
300
300
300
Batch Data
50
100
100
200
SFC block
10
5
5
20
Operation
200
0
0
0
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20
0
0
0
256
256
256
256
Unit Instruments Offsite block Valve pattern monitor (VPM64) 1 sec./10 sec. trend
64
512
512
512
SEBOL daemon
100
5
5
5
SFC simultaneous execution
150
5
5
5
70
0
0
20
ADL
SEBOL user function Recipe area
500 Kbyte
0
0
0
User C / Option area
128 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte F010416E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-71
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the LFCS2 : LFCS2 £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the LFCS2: Table FCS Database Types : LFCS2 £ Migration
General-Purpose Element for each station (*1)
5800
5800
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
8
8
4000
4000
256
256
Communication I/O
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
1000
1000
Batch Event Message
500
500
1000
1000
Node Common Switch Global Switch
Printing Message Operator Guide Message
500
500
Control Drawing
200
200
1200
1200
600
400
Sequence (M-size)
0
400
Sequence (L-size)
0
100
1000
1000
Sequence Elements 1
700
1050
General-purpose Calculations
500
1050
Faceplate
200
200
Logic operation
200
200
Sequence Elements 2
200
600
Batch Data
400
500
SFC block
60
10
Operation
400
0
Unit Instruments
60
0
Offsite block
40
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
ADL
512
512
SEBOL daemon
250
10
SFC simultaneous execution
150
10
70
0
1 Mbyte
0
200 Kbyte
200 Kbyte
Regulatory control / Calculation Sequence
Switch Instruments
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
SEBOL user function Recipe area User C / Option area
F010417E.EPS
*1: *2:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-72
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the KFCS : KFCS £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the KFCS: Table FCS Database Types (1/3) : KFCS £ GeneralPurpose
General-Purpose Continuous (Large number Monitoring of elements)
SEQ Control Regulatory (mainly by Control SFC Blocks)
Sequence Monitoring
Element for each station (*1)
2000
5800
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
10
10
10
10
10
10
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
256
256
256
256
256
256
Node Common Switch Global Switch
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
200
200
16
16
16
16
16
16
6
6
6
6
6
6
700 (250)
550 (250)
2000 (250)
300 (250)
800 (250)
300 (250)
450
450
200
200
300
200
Sequence (M-size)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sequence (L-size)
Communication I/O
Number of ALF111 installation Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) Regulatory control / Calculation (*4) Sequence
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch Instruments
450
450
450
2000
300
1000
Sequence Elements 1
600
600
450
600
600
600
General-purpose Calculations
400
450
200
200
550
200
Faceplate
200
50
200
200
200
200
Logic operation
150
150
150
150
100
150
Sequence Elements 2
150
150
150
150
150
150
Batch Data
200
200
200
200
300
50
SFC block
10
10
0
0
0
80
Operation
0
0
0
0
0
20
Unit Instruments
0
0
0
0
0
5
Offsite block
0
0
0
0
0
0
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
256
256
ADL
512
512
512
512
512
512
SEBOL daemon
10
10
0
0
0
40
SFC simultaneous execution
10
10
0
0
0
80
SEBOL user function
0
0
0
0
0
20
Recipe area
0
0
0
0
0
0
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
User C / Option area
F010418E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules. The number in () is the number of FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-73
Table FCS Database Types (2/3) : KFCS £ SEQ Control (mainly by Sequence Blocks)
Unit Control (without Recipe)
Unit Control (with Recipe)
Offsite Block
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
2000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
2500
10
10
10
10
4000
4000
4000
4000
Node Common Switch
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
Global Switch Communication I/O
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
16
2
2
16
6
6
6
6
400 (250)
250 (30)
250 (30)
700 (250)
600
250
200
350
0
0
0
0
Number of ALF111 installation Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) Regulatory control / Calculation (*4) Sequence Sequence (M-size) Sequence (L-size)
0
0
0
0
1000
500
450
450
Sequence Elements 1
600
600
500
600
General-purpose Calculations
200
100
80
400
Faceplate
200
100
50
200
Logic operation
150
100
50
150
Sequence Elements 2
150
150
50
150
400
50
50
200
Switch Instruments
Batch Data SFC block
10
10
10
10
Operation
0
250
200
0
Unit Instruments
0
30
30
0
Offsite block
0
0
0
80
0
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
256
ADL
512
128
64
512
SEBOL daemon
10
120
100
10
SFC simultaneous execution
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
10
150
150
10
SEBOL user function
0
70
70
0
Recipe area
0
0
1 Mbyte
0
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
128 Kbyte
User C / Option area
SEQ Control (mainly by Sequence Blocks)
Unit Control (without Recipe)
Unit Control (with Recipe)
Offsite Block F010420E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules. The number in () is the number of FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-74
Table FCS Database Types (3/3) : KFCS £ Valve pattern monitor
Migration Type Sequence Control (with Expanded (with Expanded Sequence Table) Sequence Block)
Migration
Element for each station (*1)
2000
2000
2000
4000
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
4000
10
10
10
4000
4000
4000
Node Common Switch
10 4000
256
256
256
256
4000
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
500
500
500
500
Batch Event Message
200
200
200
200
Global Switch Communication I/O
Printing Message
400
400
400
400
Operator Guide Message
200
200
200
200
Control Drawing
200
200
200
200
Number of ALF111 installation
2
2
2
2
Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3)
6
6
6
6
Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)
250 (30)
300 (30)
300 (30)
500 (30)
Sequence
200
450
200
200
Sequence (M-size)
0
0
200
100
Sequence (L-size)
0
0
50
100
Switch Instruments
450
600
600
600
Sequence Elements 1
500
600
600
700
General-purpose Calculations
80
600
600
500
Faceplate
50
50
50
10
Logic operation
50
100
100
100
Sequence Elements 2
50
300
300
300
Batch Data
50
100
100
200
SFC block
10
5
5
20
Operation
200
0
0
0
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Unit Instruments Offsite block Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
20
0
0
0
256
256
256
256
64
512
512
512
SEBOL daemon
100
5
5
5
SFC simultaneous execution
150
5
5
5
70
0
0
20
Recipe area
500 Kbyte
0
0
0
User C / Option area
128 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
64 Kbyte
1 sec./10 sec. trend ADL
SEBOL user function
Valve pattern monitor
Migration
Migration Type Sequence Control (with Expanded (with Expanded Sequence Table) Sequence Block) F010421E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules. The number in () is the number of FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-75
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the KFCS2 : KFCS2 £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database types for the KFCS2: Table FCS Database Types : KFCS2 £ Migration
General-Purpose
Remote Node Expanded
Element for each station (*1)
5800
5800
5800
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500
2500
2500
10
10
15
4000
4000
4000
256
256
256
Communication I/O
4000
4000
4000
Annunciator Message
1000
1000
1000
Batch Event Message
500
500
500
1000
1000
1000
Operator Guide Message
500
500
500
Control Drawing
Node Common Switch Global Switch
Printing Message
200
200
200
Number of ALF111 installation
16
16
32
Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3)
16
16
16
1200 (600)
1200 (600)
1200 (600)
Regulatory control / Calculation (*4)
600
400
600
Sequence (M-size)
0
400
0
Sequence (L-size)
0
100
0
1000
1000
1000
Sequence Elements 1
700
1050
700
General-purpose Calculations
500
1050
500
Faceplate
200
200
200
Logic operation
200
200
200
Sequence Elements 2
200
600
200
Batch Data
400
500
400
SFC block
60
10
60
Operation
400
0
400
Unit Instruments
60
0
60
Offsite block
40
0
40
0
0
0
1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
256
256
ADL
512
512
512
SEBOL daemon
250
10
210
SFC simultaneous execution
150
10
150
70
0
70
Sequence
Switch Instruments
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64)
SEBOL user function Recipe area User C / Option area
1 Mbyte
0
1 Mbyte
200 Kbyte
200 Kbyte
200 Kbyte
General-Purpose
Migration
Remote Node Expanded F010422E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules. The number in () is the number of FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-76
● FCS Database Types Selectable in the FFCS : FFCS £ The following table lists the application capacities for the FCS database type for the FFCS: Table FCS Database Types : FFCS £ General-Purpose Element for each station (*1)
5800
Function block/element for each area (*2)
2500 4
Node Common Switch Global Switch
4000 256
Communication I/O
4000
Annunciator Message
1000
Batch Event Message
500
Printing Message
1000
Operator Guide Message
500
Control Drawing
200
Number of ALF111 installation
30
Number of ALR111, ALR121, ALE111, and ALP111 installation (*3) Regulatory control / Calculation (*4) Sequence
8 500 (500) 200
Sequence (M-size)
0
Sequence (L-size)
0
Switch Instruments
500
Sequence Elements 1
500
General-purpose Calculations
400
Faceplate
120
Logic operation
100
Sequence Elements 2
100
Batch Data
100
SFC block
40
Operation
200
Unit Instruments
30
Offsite block
30 0
Valve pattern monitor (VPM64) 1 sec./10 sec. trend
256
ADL
512
SEBOL daemon
210
SFC simultaneous execution
150 70
SEBOL user function Recipe area User C / Option area
1 Mbyte 200 Kbyte General-Purpose F010423E.EPS
*1: *2: *3: *4:
The element for each station indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to contact I/O (%Z), common switches (%SW), global switches (%GS), and communication I/O (%WB). The function block/element for each area indicates the total number of the tag names that may be assigned to function blocks and annunciators (%AN). The total number of mounted ALR111, ALR121, ALE 111 and ALP111 modules. The number in () is the number of FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks can be applied. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-77
■ Station Address ¡ ▼ Station Number
Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the VL net. The station address is composed of a domain number and a station number. The domain number may be set in the dialog box when creating the project. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.
● Station Number ¡ Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. With FCSs, the station number is generally set from 1 in ascending order. The station number may be set in the range of 1 to 24. The station number can not be changed once it is set.
■ Station Address £ ▼ Domain Number, Station Number
Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the V net. The station address is composed of a domain number and a station number.
● Domain Number £ Set a domain number for a new FCS to be created. Set a domain number in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.
● Station Number £ Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. With FCSs, the station number is generally set from 1 in ascending order. The station number may be set for each domain in the range of 1 to 64. The station number can not be changed once it is set.
■ Component Numbers ▼ Component Number
Component numbers are used for devices that are configured in the project. For example, assigning a component number to a FCS cabinet will be much convenient for wiring the cables by labelling the connection origin or connection destination component numbers. Component number settings may be omitted.
■ Station Comments ▼ Station Comment
If more information about each station is required, the station comment may be input for each station. The station comment may be omitted. The station comment is displayed on the FCS property tab.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-78
■ Alias of Station ▼ Alias of Station
An alias can be used as an alternative of station name. After setting aliases, the stations displayed on the HIS will be indicated by their aliases. An alias of a station can be defined with up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
■ Station Status Display ▼ Station Status Display
A window can be designated to display the station status on HIS instead of using the HIS station status display panel. The name of this window can be designated using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
■ Upper Equipment Name The name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be designated using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
■ High-Speed Scan Period ¡ High-speed Scan period may be applied when the fast response is required for the process control. Either 200 msec or 500 msec may be specified as the High-speed Scan period. “50” msec, “100” msec or “250” msec can also be used by direct entry from keyboard. The default is 200 msec. SEE ALSO For details on High-speed Scan period, see the following: “● High-Speed Scan ¡ ” in “■ Scan Period ¡ ” in C7.1.1, “Scan Period”
■ High-Speed Scan Period £ High-speed Scan period may be applied when the fast response is required for the process control. Either 200 msec or 500 msec may be specified as the High-speed Scan period. “50” msec, “100” msec or “250” msec can also be used by direct entry from keyboard. The default is 200 msec. SEE ALSO For details on High-speed Scan period, see the following: “● High-Speed Scan £ ” in “■ Scan Period £ ” in C7.1.1, “Scan Period”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-79
■ Medium-Speed Scan Period – KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £ Medium-speed scan period may be applied when the relatively faster response is required for the process control. Either 200 msec or 500 msec may be specified as the medium-speed scan period. “50” msec, “100” msec or “250” msec can also be used by direct entry from keyboard. The default is 500 msec. SEE ALSO For details on Medium-speed Scan period, see the following: “● Medium-Speed Scan : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £ ” in “■ Scan Period £ ” in C7.1.1, “Scan Period”
■ Pulse Width and Serial Startup Interval for MC Instrument Block The settings related to motor control blocks (MC-2 and MC-3) may be set.
● Pulse Width When the MC-2 or MC-3 blocks output signal conversion type is either [2-position Pulsive Output ] or [3-position Pulsive Output], the time span of the contact output signal’s ON (pulse width) may be set. The range for setting the pulse width is from 1 to 100 seconds. The default setting is 1 second. SEE ALSO For details on pulse width of the MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, see the following: “● Pulse Width Time” in “■ Output Signal Conversion of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)” in D1.17.3, “Output Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)”
● Serial Start Interval The serial start function puts the motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) of the same control station into groups and starts multiple motor control blocks (MC-2, MC-3) in the same group sequentially at a specified interval when start requests are issued to these blocks simultaneously. Serial start is executed only when the manipulated output value (MV) is changed to a greater value. The serial start interval may be set between 0 and 9999 seconds. The default setting is 0 second. SEE ALSO For details on the serial start interval of the MC-2 and MC-3 blocks, see the following: “■ Serial Start” in D1.17.2, “Control Computation Processing of Motor Control Blocks (MC-2, MC-2E, MC-3, and MC-3E)”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-80
■ MLD-SW Block AUT/CAS Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW) is a function block to switch the output between the signal from the connected function block such as a regulatory control block and the manual output signal of itself. When MLD-SW is in manual (MAN) mode, it outputs the manipulated output value (MV) set by the operator. When MLD-SW is in automatic (AUT) or cascade (CAS) mode, the signal input from other function block (CSV) is calculated and output as the manipulate output value (MV) of MLD-SW. The mode AUT or CAS may be set for the situation that the MLD-SW outputs the signal from another function block (CSV), then calculated and output as it’s own manipulate output value (MV). The default setting is [AUT]. SEE ALSO For details on MLD-SW block automatic mode, see the following: “■ Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)” in D1.16, “Manual Loader Block with Auto/Man SW (MLD-SW)”
■ Action Type of SEBOL “drive” Statement There are 3 action types of SEBOL “drive” statement may be specified. In accordance with the block mode of the function block which is running SEBOL and the action type specified here, the permission to output the operation commands to function blocks may be checked. SEE ALSO For details on the SEBOL “drive” statement, see the following: H1.5.4, “drive Statement”
■ Setting Options ▼ Options
When using option programs, the programs need to be registered on the FCS properties setting box. After installing the option programs, the programs may be listed on the properties setting box for registration. Select an option program from the list in the combo box displayed in the [Options] setting area, then click [Add] button to register the program.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-81
■ Blocks with User-Defined Data Items £ ▼ User-Defined Block
In order to use the blocks containing data items that can be defined by users (SFC block, unit instrument), a specific area for the user-defined instrument information needs to be specified. When you create a new FCS, free space based on the database type of the FCS is automatically searched for and a value that does not overlap with other FCSs is set as the default value. If you change this value, it is checked whether or not the changed value overlaps with other FCSs, and a message is displayed if it does. [Number of Block Type] displays the number of blocks with user-defined data items that can be used for the database types. Make sure to specify the start position of the area by referencing [Number of Block Type] if you wish to enter a value other than the default value for [Block-type start number]. Specify a value that does not overlap with other FCSs for [Block-type start number] in the range from 0 to 7679.
■ Action when Downloading to IOM When downloading to an I/O module, the behavior of function blocks connected to the module may be specified as IOP (input open) or not. SEE ALSO For details on the actions of I/O modules during downloading, see the following: B3.5, “Operation of I/O Module when Downloading is Performed”
■ PID Pulse Width Output Specify whether the MV value should be set to “50%” or “previous MV value” when pulses are not output under the conditions that the block mode is in the AUT mode and there is no feedback input. If you check the [CENTUM V Compatible MV Display] check box, the MV value becomes 50% in the case above. By default, this check box is not checked (the previous MV value is specified). SEE ALSO For more information about PID Pulse Width Output, see the following: “● No Feedback, Pulse Width Output MV at AUT Mode” in section “■ Feedback Input” in C4.8.2, “Pulse Width Output Conversion”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-82
■ PI-HLD Action after Hold Specify whether “PV value immediately before holding the output” or “current PV value” should be used for the previous PV value used in the first control calculation after the output is held in a PI-HLD block. If you check the [CENTUM-XL Compatible] check box, the previous PV value used in the first control calculation after the output is held is overwritten with the current PV value. By default, this check box is not checked (the PV value immediately before holding the output is used). SEE ALSO For more information about PI-HLD Action after Hold, see the following: “● PI-HLD Action after Hold” in section “■ PI Control Computation with Hold” in D1.6, “Sampling PI Controller Block (PI-HLD)”
■ Sequence Table Algorithm The algorithm of the sequence table can be specified. SEE ALSO For more information about the algorithm of the sequence tables, see the following: “■ Action of Step Sequence” in D3.2.3, “Sequence Table Processing Flow”
● CENTUM XL Compatible Sequence Tables: KFCS2/FFCS2/LFCS2 Regarding the following actions, the compatible algorithm with CENTUM XL can be specified. • The output action corresponds to the “L” argument in the action rule of the sequence table • The output action corresponds to the “P” argument in the action rule of the sequence table • The action timing of Step00 in the step type sequence table When the check box of [CENTUM XL Compatible Sequence Tables] is checked, the above actions will be the same as CENTUM XL sequence tables. By default, this option is not checked.
● THAN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence: KFCS2/FFCS2/LFCS2 When the check box of [THAN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is checked, if the next step is directed by THAN/ELSE, the next step directed in the action rule will be ignored. However, if the next step is not directed by THAN/ELSE, the next step directed in the action rule will be activated (CENTUM XL compatible actions). Vice versa, when the check box of [THAN/ELSE Has Higher Precedence] is not checked, the next step directed in the action rule will be activated and the next step directed by THAN/ELSE will be ignored. By default, this check box is not checked.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-83
■ ∆PV/∆CPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP The ∆PV (or ∆CPV) output from the SUB terminal can be set to output 0 right after the data status of PV (or CPV) becomes bad (BAD) by checking the option box of [∆PV/∆CPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP]. By default, this check box is not checked. SEE ALSO For more information about ∆PV/∆CPV Output from SUB Becomes Zero Right After IOP, see the following: “■ Auxiliary Output (⌬PV) When PV Data Status is BAD : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 £” in C4.10, “Output Processing in Unsteady State” “■ Auxiliary Output (⌬CPV) When CPV Data Status is Bad : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 £” in C4.10, “Output Processing in Unsteady State”
■ Accept Batch-End During EMST When BSETU-2 or BSETU-3 block was emergently stopped, whether to accept the batchend event during the EMST status can be specified by checking or unchecking the check box of [Accept Batch-End During EMST]. By default, this check box is checked, i.e., the batch-end event will be accepted when the block is running into EMST status. SEE ALSO For more information about batch-end event during EMST, see the following: “● Basic Batch Operation” in “■ Batch Operation (Analog Output)” in D1.20.2, “Control Algorithm of Totalizing Batch Set Blocks (BSETU-2, BSETU-3)”
■ SS-DUAL PV Update during Deviation Alarm ▼ SS-DUAL PV Update During Deviation Alarm
When SS-DUAL block signal selector switch is at the position 3, both input1 and input2 will be monitored. If one of them is not normal, the switch will select the normal side input. If a deviation alarm occurs, to update PV or to hold the current PV can be set by checking this option. When checking the option box for [SS-DUAL PV Update During Deviation Alarm], if a deviation alarm occurs when the switch position is 3, the data status of PV will become BAD but the PV itself will continue to update vary with the selected input signal. The default setting does not check this option, so that when a deviation alarm occurs, the SS-DUAL will hold its current PV. This setting covers all SS-DUAL blocks for the whole FCS.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-84
■ Alarm Notify Action when All AOF Released ▼ Alarm Notify Action When All AOF Released
When alarm inhibition (AOF) of all function blocks are released, if the existing alarm gives an output or not can be specified by checking this option box. When checking [Alarm Notify Action When All AOF Released] option box, all the existing alarms will output when their inhibitions (AOF) are released all together. By default setting, this option box is not checked, so that the existing alarms will not output when AOF released. This setting covers the whole FCS, it can only be changed via offline maintenance.
● Do not Output Alarms when AOF Released All Together (Default Setting) When AOF released all together, the existing alarms will not output alarms to notify the HIS.
● Output Existing Alarms when AOF Released All Together When AOF released all together, all the existing alarms will behave like newly initiated alarms and send the alarm outputs to the HIS. When AOF is released one by one (Example: TagName.AOF.IOP released), the alarm will not give an output even when the alarm status exists. For the alarms inhibited by Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R), when the inhibition is released by changing the SV or SW of the ALM-R block, the existing alarms will not initiate alarm message outputs.
■ Specify Reference Station for Tag List ▼ Specify Reference Station for Tag List
● Enable to Designate Station for Referencing Tag List The tag list of a designated station can be referenced when checking this option box. After checking [Specify Reference Station for Tag List] option box, designating a station for referencing the tag list will be enabled. When this option is not checked, the stations start from smallest domain number and the smallest station number will be listed in ascending order and set as the default stations for referencing tag list.
● The Station for Referencing Tag List Among the station list, the station for referencing tag list may be designated. This is possible only when the option box [Specify Reference Station for Tag List] is checked. In the station list, the stations in the system configuration as well as the stations removed from the system configuration but had been registered as the referencing station before removal are available for designation. If choose the station already removed from the system configuration for referencing the tag list, an error will occur.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-85
■ Annunciator Message with Data ▼ Annunciator Message with Data
● Annunciator Message Head Number The annunciator message head number can be designated. When an annunciator is initiated, the data assigned for the annunciator can be referenced for the printing message. The annunciators from the designated annunciator head number will correspond one by one to the printing messages from the designated printing message head number.
● Printing Message Head Number The printing message head number corresponds to the annunciator message head number can be designated. When the setting for annunciator message head number or for printing message head number is not correct, an error will be displayed in the dialog box and the setting will become invalid. Table Check the Settings for Annunciator Message Head Number and Printing Message Head Number
Check
Result
Annunciator Message Head Number=0 AND Printing Message Head Number=0
OK
Annunciator Message Head Number !=0 AND Printing Message Head Number !=0
OK
Annunciator Message Head Number > Total Annunciator Messages
NG
Printing Message Head Number > Total Printing Messages
NG
(Total Annunciator Messages - Annunciator Message Head Number) > (Total Printing Messages - Printing Message Head Number)
NG F010411E.EPS
■ Increase Number of System Common Switches : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/LFCS2/LFCS £ If you check this check box, the number of system common switches (%SW0001 to %SW0200) is extended to %SW0001 to %SW0400. By default, this check box is checked (extend).
■ Preset MV Valid Immediately : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 £ When a preset MV switch (PSW) is activated, the control blocks have two options of [Preset MV valid by Preset Switch] and [Preset MV valid at next scan] to handle the preset MV. All the function blocks with preset MV subject to this option setting except for pulse width outputs. The [Preset MV valid at next scan] is the default option. However, for the system to compliant the CENTUM V and CENTUM-XL, [Preset MV valid by Preset Switch] option should be used. SEE ALSO For more information about Preset MV valid immediately, see the following: “■ Preset MV Valid Immediately : KFCS2/FFCS/LFCS2 £” in C4.4, “Preset Manipulated Output”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-86
■ State Transition Matrix ▼ Specify State Transition Matrix
When the FCS database is a type of database for unit configuration, state transition matrix can be defined.
● Maximum Specification Number Indicates the total number of state transition matrixes. This is only an indication can not be edited.
● Designating a State Transition Matrix A state transition matrix to be applied in this FCS can be selected from the state transition matrix list of this project. In the matrix list, the matrixes registered in the project as well as the matrixes removed from the project but had been registered as the state transition matrix before removal are available for selection. If choose a matrix already removed from the project as the state transition matrix, an error will occur.
■ Making IO Bus Dual-Redundant : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Make IO Bus Dual-Redundant
Specify whether or not the ESB bus is made dual-redundant in an FCS in which only one CPU card is used. When this checkbox is checked to make the ESB bus dual-redundant, the ESB buses will usually be used alternatively. If an error occurs in one of the ESB buses, the other ESB bus will be used for communication. Error recovery monitoring of an abnormal ESB bus will be performed periodically. SEE ALSO • For details on making the ESB bus dual-redundant for KFCS2/KFCS, see the following: “■ Dual-Redundant Architecture of Extended Serial Backboard Bus (ESB Bus): KFCS2/KFCS £ ” in B4.2, “Dual-Redundant Architecture of KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS” • For details on making the ESB bus dual-redundant for FFCS, see the following: “■ Dual-Redundant Architecture of Extended Serial Backboard Bus (ESB Bus): FFCS £ ” in B4.2, “Dual-Redundant Architecture of KFCS2, KFCS and FFCS”
■ Interface Card Type : KFCS2/KFCS £ ▼ Interface Card Type
Specify the type of the ESB bus interface card (SB301/SB302). To use the CENTUM-XL cabinet, specify SB302. To use a rack mountable type, specify SB301.
■ Using XL-HKU : KFCS2/KFCS £ ▼ Use XL-HKU
Check this checkbox to monitor the status of the CENTUM-XL cabinet. This can only be specified when SB302 is specified for the type of the ESB bus interface card. A maximum of four cabinets can be monitored.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-87
■ Making RIO Bus Dual-Redundant : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Make RIO Bus Dual-Redundant
The RIO bus dual-redundant configuration may be specified even for single CPU FCS. In RIO bus Dual-Redundant Configuration RIO buses is usually alternatively used. If an error occurs in one bus, the other bus will be used for communication. Error recovery in the buses will be monitored periodically. SEE ALSO For details on making the RIO bus dual-redundant, see the following: “■ Dual-Redundant Architecture of FCU : LFCS2/LFCS £ ” in B4.3, “Dual-Redundant Architecture of LFCS2 and LFCS”
■ Repeater Connection : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Repeater Connection
Allowed transmission distance of the RIO bus may be extended by connecting a bus repeater. Specify whether to connect a bus repeater to the RIO bus.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-88
■ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings ¡ £ ▼ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings
Normally there is no need to change the TCP/IP protocol setting for the control bus.
● Control Bus IP Address ¡ £ The IP addresses on the control bus are used to logically identify the HIS for communication among HISs on the control bus. The bus type, domain number and station number of an IP address on the control bus is automatically determined. In normal situation, the automatically determined setting should be used. 172. 16. dd. ss 172:System fixed 16: Identifier showing that the bus type is control bus (fixed) dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1) Domain number specified during FCS creation (*2) ss: Station number specified during FCS creation *1: ¡ This is for the CS 1000. *2: £ This is for the CS 3000.
● Control Bus Subnet Mask The control bus subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” as the default setting. In normal situations, this default setting should be used.
■ Control Drawing Builder ▼ Use Control Drawing Builder
On the Function Block Detail Builder, a check box “Use control drawing builder” is provided. Check this box when using the Control Drawing Builder. TIP For CS 1000, Control Drawing is optional.
SEE ALSO For details on the Control Drawing Builder, see the following: F3, “Control Drawing Builder”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-89
F1.4.2 Creating a New HIS In the dialog box for creating a new HIS, the following items need to be defined.
■ Station Type ¡ £ ▼ Station Type
The HIS station type may be specified.
● HIS Station Type ¡ There are two station types for the HIS as shown below: • PC with Operation and Monitoring Functions • YPCKIT Open Display Style Console Type HIS
● HIS Station Type £ There are four station types for the HIS as shown below: • PC with Operation and Monitoring Functions • LPCKIT Enclosed Display Style Console Type HIS • YPCKIT Open Display Style Console Type HIS • HIS-TSE HIS with Server for Remote Operation and monitoring function SEE ALSO For the details on the HIS-TSE, see the following: M12, “Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function”
■ Station Address ¡ ▼ Station Number
Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the VL net. The station address is composed of domain number and station number. The domain number may be set in the dialog box when creating the project. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.
● Station Number ¡ Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. With HISs, the station number is generally set from the maximum number in descending order. The station number may be set in the range of 1 to 24. The station number can not be changed once it is set.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-90
■ Station Address £ ▼ Station Number, Domain Number
Station addresses are used to identify the stations on the V net. The station address is composed of a domain number and a station number.
● Domain Number £ Set a domain number for a new HIS to be created. Set a domain number in the range of 1 to 16. The domain number can not be changed once it is set.
● Station Number £ Station numbers are used to identify the devices in the same domain of the system. With HISs, the station number is generally set from the maximum number in descending order. The station number may be set for each domain in the range of 1 to 64. The station number can not be changed once it is set.
■ Component Numbers ▼ Component Number
Component numbers are used for devices that are configured in the project. These numbers are used to indicate the connection origin or connection destination component numbers when wiring the devices. Component number settings may be omitted.
■ Station Comments ▼ Station Comment
If more information about each station is required, the station comment may be input for each station. The station comment may be omitted. The station comment is displayed on the HIS property tab.
■ Alias of Station ▼ Alias of Station
An alias can be used as an alternative of station name. After setting aliases, the stations displayed on the HIS will be indicated by their aliases. An alias of a station can be defined with up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
■ Station Status Display ▼ Station Status Display
A window can be designated to display the station status on HIS instead of using the HIS station status display panel. The name of this window can be designated using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
■ Upper Equipment Name The name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be designated. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-91
■ Buzzer ACK ID The buzzer ACK ID is an ID that allows buzzers on other HISs with the same buzzer ACK ID to be reset when a buzzer is acknowledged on one HIS. The buzzer ACK ID can be set with up to eight single-byte characters. SEE ALSO For details on the buzzer ACK ID, see the following: “● Buzzer - ACK ID” in “■ Buzzer Sounds” in E11.2, “Message Output Actions”
■ Operation Group Identifier The operation group identifier is used for the identification if different operation groups exist. Up to eight single-byte characters may be used for an identifier. The first two characters are identifier characters, the rest are comment text. The default setting is [A1]. A wild card [*] may be used as the operation group identifier. SEE ALSO For details on operation group, see the following: E1.5, “Operation Group”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-92
■ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings ¡ £ ▼ Control Bus TCP/IP Settings
Normally, there is no need to change the TCP/IP protocol setting.
● Control Bus Host Name ¡ £ The control bus host name is automatically determined according to the bus type, domain number and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined host name should be used. Mddss M: Identifier indicating that the bus type is control bus (fixed) dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1) Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2) ss: Station number specified during HIS creation *1: ¡ This is for the CS 1000. *2: £ This is for the CS 3000.
● Control Bus IP Address ¡ £ The IP addresses on the control bus are used to logically identify the HIS for communication among HISs on the control bus. The IP address on the control bus is automatically determined according to the bus type, domain number and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined setting should be used. 172.16.dd. ss 172:System fixed 16: Identifier showing that the bus type is control bus (fixed) dd: Domain number specified during project creation (*1) Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2) ss: Station number specified during HIS creation *1: ¡ This is for the CS 1000. *2: £ This is for the CS 3000.
● Control Bus Subnet Mask The control bus subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” by default. In normal situations, this default setting should be used.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-93
■ Ethernet TCP/IP Settings ¡ £ ▼ Ethernet TCP/IP Settings
Make sure that the names of HIS computer and HIS station match. Normally, there is no need to specify the Ethernet TCP/IP. Make sure to use the initial settings.
IMPORTANT The Ethernet TCP/IP needs to be specified to connect to an HIS on another subnet via a router. If any HIS is connected this way within a project, consult with Yokogawa.
● Ethernet Hostname ¡ £ The Ethernet Hostname will be automatically determined according to the bus type, domain number and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined hostname should be used. Eddss E: Identifier indicating that the bus type is Ethernet (fixed) dd: Domain number specified when the project was created (*1) Domain number specified when HIS was created (*2) ss: Station number specified when HIS was created *1: ¡ For CS 1000. *2: £ For CS 3000.
● Ethernet IP Address ¡ £ Ethernet IP addresses are used to logically identify the HIS connected to the Ethernet. The Ethernet IP addresses are automatically determined according to the bus type, domain number and station number. In normal situations, the automatically determined setting should be used. 172.17.dd. ss : Ethernet IP address 172:System fixed 17: Identifier showing that the bus type is Ethernet (fixed) dd: Domain number specified during the project creation (*1) Domain number specified during HIS creation (*2) ss: Station number specified during the HIS creation *1: ¡ This is for the CS 1000. *2: £ This is for the CS 3000.
● Ethernet Subnet Mask The Ethernet subnet mask is set to “255.255.0.0” by default. Normally, this default setting should be used.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-94
F1.4.3 Creating a New BCV BCV represents Bus Converter for RL Bus (BCV-L), Bus Converter for HF Bus (BCVH), Bus Converter for V net (BCV-V) , Bus Converter for VL net (BCV-A) and SIOS (System Integration OPC Station). When creating a BCV, the configurations vary with the types of bus converter. SEE ALSO For more information about bus converters, see the followings: L3.3.3, “Creating a New Bus Converter for RL Bus” L4.3.3, “Creating a New Bus Converter for HF Bus” L1.3, “Engineering of Bus Converter for V net” L2.3, “Engineering of Bus Converter for VL net” R3, “SIOS Engineering”
■ Precautions when Creating a Bus Converter The station names for bus converters are as follows: BCV-L: BCVLddnn BCV-H: BCVHddnn BCV-V: BCVVddnn BCV-A: BCVVddnn BCV-Q: BCVVddnn dd: Domain number
nn: Station number
Domain number and station number will be assigned automatically. When multiple projects are connected via a BCV, configure the BCV in the upper level project (domain) of the network is necessary. Offline-downloading to a BCV is possible only when the BCV is configured in the upper level. If a BCV is put in the lower level project (domain), an error will occur when offline-downloading to the BCV. A BCV can not be created in a BCV folder. When bus converters are configured in cascade, the information of stations should be defined in all bus converters respectively. The bus converters can not be displayed in cascade on the directory tree view.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-95
F1.4.4 Creating a New CGW CGW stands for both Text Mode Communication Gateway Unit and Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit. The type of CGW can be selected on the dialog box for “Create New CGW.”
■ Text Mode Communication Gateway Unit In the dialog box for creating a new text mode communication gateway unit, the following items need to be defined. • Station Type • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name • Ethernet TCP/IP protocol • Use Router • Maximum number of received texts • Perform sequence number control • Communication mode • Delimiter • Receive MS message • Perform OOB notification • Specify Reference Station for Tag List SEE ALSO For details on each definition item for the text mode communication gateway unit, see the following: L5.4, “Text Mode Gateway Engineering”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-96
■ Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit ¡ In the dialog box for creating a new frame mode communication gateway unit, the following items need to be defined. • Station Type • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name • Ethernet TCP/IP protocol • Use Router • Upper Domain Number • Receive Lower Status • Connect Authorization Station List SEE ALSO For details on each definition item for the frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following: L6.2, “Frame Mode Gateway Engineering”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-97
■ Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit £ There are two types of Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit, [Frame Mode] and [Connect to Wide Area Network]. Either of functions can be selected for the unit. However, both functions can not be used at the same time.
● Frame Mode Function Configuration Items £ In the dialog box for creating a new communication gateway (Frame Mode) unit, the following items need to be configured. • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name • Ethernet TCP/IP protocol • Use Router • Upper Domain Number • Receive Lower Status • Connect Authorization Station List SEE ALSO For details on each definition item for frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following: L6.2, “Frame Mode Gateway Engineering”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-98
● WAN Connecting Configuration Items £ In the dialog box for creating a new communication gateway (Connect to Wide Area Network) unit, the following items need to be configured. • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name • Ethernet TCP/IP protocol • Use Router • Server/Client Function Type • Remote Destination CGW • Receive Remote Status • Receive FCS Message • Receive HIS Message • Receive System Time • Enable TCP/IP on FCS • Load Distribution Filter SEE ALSO For details on each definition item for frame mode communication gateway unit, see the following: L6.4, “Wide Area Connection Gateway Engineering”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-99
F1.4.5 Creating a New SCS When integrating ProSafe-RS with CS 3000, the ProSafe-RS SCS (Safety Control Station) needs to be created in CS 3000 project. For the newly created SCS, the following items need to be defined. • Station Type • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name SEE ALSO For more information about SCS engineering, see the following: 2.2, “Engineering on the CS 3000 Side” in Integration with CENTUM CS 3000 (IM 32S01E10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-100
F1.4.6 Creating a New Station The stations other than above described may be created on the Create New Station dialog box and the following items need to be defined. • Station Type • Station Name • Station Address • Component Number • Station Comment • Alias of Station • Station Status Display • Upper Equipment Name • Tag Suffix • Actual Device • Make Control Bus Dual-Redundant (*1) • Station Status Display Window Name • Control bus TCP/IP Protocol • Ethernet TCP/IP Protocol *1:
¡ This item is available only on CS 1000 system.
TIP The definition items are determined depending on the station type.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-101
■ Station Type List ¡ The types of machines may be configured as Station are listed as follows. Table Station Type List ¡ Station Type
Description
UHMIS Unified Operation/Monitoring Exaopc Station Station UHMIS HP9000
HP9000 connected via Frame Mode Communication Gateway Unit
XL MFCD-EXT Control Unit XL MFCD-STD Control Unit XL MFCN-EXT Control Unit XL MFCN-STD Control Unit XL MFCU-EXT Control Unit XL MFCU-STD Control Unit XL MFMU-EXT Control Unit XL MFMU-STD Control Unit XL MFSD-EXT Control Unit XL MFSD-STD Control Unit XL MFSU-EXT Control Unit XL MFSU-STD Control Unit XL MOPS Operator Station
XL series products; Control Unit, Monitoring Unit, Operator Station
PC
A PC installed with Engineering Tools such as Fieldbus Engineering Tools but not with packages for Operation and Monitoring or a PC for engineering only. F010412E.EPS
SEE ALSO For details on each item for each type of machines, see the following chapters: • For connecting XL series products; L3.3.1, “Configuring XL Control Units and Operator Stations” • For connecting Exaopc stations, see the manuals provided with the Exaopc stations.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-102
■ Station Type List £ The types of stations can be created as Station are shown as follows: Table Station Types (1/2) £ Station Type
Description
UHMIS Unified Operation/Monitoring Station
Exaopc Station
UHMIS HP9000 Computer System
HP9000 Workstation Connected via a Frame mode Gateway
XL MFCD-EXT Control Unit XL MFCD-STD Control Unit XL MFCN-EXT Control Unit XL MFCN-STD Control Unit XL MFCU-EXT Control Unit XL MFCU-STD Control Unit XL MFMU-EXT Monitoring Unit XL MFMU-STD Monitoring Unit XL MFSD-EXT Control Unit XL MFSD-STD Control Unit XL MFSU-EXT Control Unit XL MFSU-STD Control Unit XL MOPS Operator Station XL MOPS Gateway Operator Station
XL Series
CENTUM-XL EFCD Standard Redundant Control Station CENTUM-XL EFCS Standard Non-Redundant Control Station CENTUM-XL EFCDH2 Advanced Redundant Control Station CENTUM-XL EFCSH2 Advanced Non-Redundant Control Station CENTUM-XL EFGW Field Gateway Unit CENTUM-XL EFMS Field Monitoring Station CENTUM-XL EFUD Redundant Field Control Unit CENTUM-XL EFUS Field Control Unit CENTUM-XL EOPS Operator Station CENTUM-XL EDFS Data File Station CENTUM-XL EDFW Dual Data File Station CENTUM-XL ECGW Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM-XL ECGW2 Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM-XL ECGW3 Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM-XL ENGS Engineering Station CENTUM-XL HP9000 Computer System
CENTUM-XL Series
F010413E.EPS
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-103
Table Station Types (2/2) £ Station Type
Description
CENTUM CFCD2 Redundant Control Station CENTUM CFCDE Redundant Control Station for Power Plants CENTUM CFGW Field Gateway Unit CENTUM CFMS2 Field Monitoring Station CENTUM CFSD Sequence Subjective Type Redundant Control Station CENTUM CFSS Sequence Subjective Type Non-Redundant Control Station CENTUM V Series CENTUM CGWU-1 Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM CGWU-2 Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM CGWU-1/A Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM CGWU-2/A Communication Gateway Unit CENTUM COPSV*A Operator Station CENTUM COPSV*B Operator Station CENTUM COPS2*B Operator Station
PC
A PC installed with Engineering Tools such as Fieldbus Engineering Tools but not with packages for Operation and Monitoring, or a PC for engineering only.
SCS01 Safety Control Station
ProSafe-PLC ProSafe-SLS
Other Project Stations
When multiple projects are connected, the stations such as FCS or BCV in the project at lower level network can be configured as Other Project Stations. F010414E.EPS
SEE ALSO For details on items for each type of stations, see the followings: • For connecting CENTUM-XL stations and CENTUM V stations; L4.3.1, “Defining Stations” • For connecting XL stations; L3.3.1, “Configuring XL Control Units and Operator Stations” • For connecting Exaopc stations, see the manuals provided with the Exaopc stations. • For connecting ProSafe-PLC/ProSafe-SLS; M10, “ProSafe-PLC/ProSafe-SLS Connection” • For more information about station of other project; “■ Creating New Stations for Other Projects £” in chapter M9.3.1, “Engineering Upper Projects”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1.5
F1-104
Creating a New IOM The types and locations of the input and output modules installed in an FCS can be defined. The types of I/O modules can be used on FCS vary with the type of FCS and the type of I/O bus. When the station type of an FCS is either KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS, a node for installing an I/O module must be created prior to creating an I/O module.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-105
F1.5.1 Creating a Node A node for holding I/O modules can be created.
■ Creating a New Node : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Create a new node for installing an I/O module. While selecting the [IOM] folder, select [Create New] - [Node] from the [File] menu. The following new FIO node dialog box for creating a new node will be displayed: New FIO Node Type Type Local
Remote
1
Node Remote Node Master
Use User-Defined IP Address Address of Left-Hand Side EB501 Address of Right-Hand Side EB501
Power Supply Unit Dual-Redundant Power Supply 80W 40W
24 VDC External Power Supply
Component Number Node Comment
OK
Cancel F010501E.EPS
Figure New FIO Node Dialog Box : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £
The definition items of the new FIO node dialog box are as follows:
● Node Type : KFCS2/KFCS £ ▼ Type
Two selections, Local and Remote, are available for Type. Specify the type of a node to be created. To create a remote node, it is necessary to define an EB401 (ER bus interface master module) for a local node to which that remote node is to be connected in advance. If a remote node is specified without defining an EB401 in advance, a warning dialog box will be displayed. SEE ALSO For the definition of the EB401, see the following: “■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” in F1.5.2, “Creating a New I/O Module”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-106
● Node Type : FFCS £ ▼ Type
Two selections, Local and Remote, are available for Type. Specify the type of a node to be created. • For the I/O Modules Inserted in the Slots of FCU The node for the I/O modules inserted in the slots of FCU is defined as a local node and the node number is 1. This is fixed and cannot be redefined. • A Local Node Extended From FCU When creating a local node extended from FCU, the ESB bus couple modules (EC401) must be available in the 7th and 8th slots of FCU. In this case, the 7th and 8th slots of the FCU should not be defined for any other I/O modules. If the 7th and 8th slots of FCU are defined for other I/O modules while creating a new local node, a warning dialog box will be displayed. • A Remote Node Extended From A Local Node When creating a local node extended from a local node, the ER bus couple modules (EB401) must be available in the local node. When creating a new remote node while no ER bus couple module (EB401) has been defined on the local node, a warning dialog box will be displayed. SEE ALSO For more information about EB401, see the following: “■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” in F1.5.2, “Creating a New I/O Module”
● Node Number : KFCS2/KFCS £ ▼ Node
The node number is used to identify a node unit. Specify a node number between 1 and 15(*1). The default node number is 1. A maximum of 10(*1) local nodes, a maximum of 14(*1) remote nodes, and a total of 15(*1) local and remote notes when they are mixed can be connected. Also, a maximum of four ER buses can be connected to each KFCS2/KFCS. *1:
The number of nodes for a FCS varies with the database type of the FCS. Nevertheless, the node number of a local node can be designated within the range of 1 to 10 regardless of the database type.
● Node Number : FFCS £ ▼ Node
The node number is used to identify a node unit. Specify a node number between 1 and 4. The node number 1 is reserved for the node that holding the I/O modules inserted in the slots of FCU. The nodes extended form this node can be numbered in between 2 and 4.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-107
● Remote Master Specification : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Master
Select the installation position of the EB401 (ER bus interface master module) to which a remote node is to be connected. Specify this item only when the node type is remote. The installation position is expressed in the following format: NODEn\sEB401 n: Node number s: Slot number
● Making the Power Supply Unit (PSU) Dual-Redundant : KFCS2/KFCS £ ▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply
Specify whether or not to make the power supply unit dual-redundant. To make the power supply unit dual-redundant, check this check box. By default, this check box is checked (dual-redundant power supply unit).
● Making the Power Supply Unit(PSU) Dual-Redundant : FFCS £ ▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply
Specify whether or not to make the power supply unit dual-redundant for the extended node. For the node 1 (the node that holding the I/O modules in the slots of FCU) the power supply capacity cannot be changed. Since the power supply capacity is already determined when creating the FCU. To make the power supply unit dual-redundant for an extended node, check this check box. By default, this check box is checked (dual-redundant power supply unit).
● Power Supply Capacity of the Power Supply Unit (PSU) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Power Supply Capacity
The power supply unit has two options, 80W or 40W. When using 80W power supply unit, up to six modules(*1) which can supply power to field transmitter can be installed in one node unit. If 40 W power supply unit is used, the external power supply is required when the I/O modules providing power to the field transmitters. in this case, check the check box of [24VDC from External Power Unit]. If the installed I/O modules do not supply power to the field transmitters, do not check the check box of [24VDC from External Power Unit]. Thus the 24VDC will not be supplied to the field transmitters. *1:
The following I/O modules may supply power to the field transmitters. • AAI141-S Analog Input Module • AAI135-S Analog Input Module • AAI143-S Analog Input Module • AAI543-S Analog Output Module • AAI841-S Analog Input/Output Module • AAB841-S Analog Input/Output Module • AAI835-S Analog Input/Output Module • AAP135-S Pulse Input Module • AAP849-S Pulse Input/Analog Output Module (PAC Compatible)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-108
● Component Number : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Component Numer
Enter the component number within eight single-byte characters. This field is blank by default. The component number is a number assigned to a cabinet that houses an FCS. This number is used to indicate the connecting source and destination of each cable when cables are wired. The specification of the component number may be omitted.
● Node Comment : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Node Comment
Enter a comment on the node within 24 single-byte or 12 double-byte characters. This field is blank by default. The specification of the node comment may be omitted.
● Changing the Node Properties : KFCS2/KFCS £ While selecting a node folder (NODExx), select [Properties] from the [File] menu. The new FIO node dialog box will be displayed to change the properties of the node. In this dialog box the dual-redundant power supply and power supply capacity of the power supply unit, the component number, and the node comment can be modified. To change the node type (local/remote), delete the corresponding node, and then create a new node.
● Changing the Node Properties : FFCS £ While selecting a node folder (NODExx), select [Properties] from the [File] menu. The new FIO node dialog box will be displayed to change the properties of the node. In this dialog box the component number, and the node comment can be modified. To change the expanded node type (local/remote), delete the corresponding node, and then create a new node.
● Deleting a Node : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ While selecting a node folder (NODExx), select [Delete] from the [File] menu, or press the [Del] key on the keyboard. A dialog box that confirms the deletion of the node will be displayed. Click the [OK] button to delete the node. However, if there is an IOM under the node, the node can not be deleted.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-109
■ Creating a New Node : LFCS2/LFCS £ When a new LFCS is added, one node will be automatically created in primary I/O bus. You can create more nodes, delete existing nodes and change nodes’ properties. While selecting the [IOM] folder, select [Create New] [Node] from the [File] menu. The following create new node dialog box will be displayed: Create New NODE Type
Unit
Node Number
2
Dual-Redundant Power Supply HKU set Installation pattern Cabinet
Rack
Component Number Node Comment
OK
Cancel F010502E.EPS
Figure Create New NODE Dialog Box : LFCS2/LFCS £
The create new node dialog box consists of the Type tab and the Unit tab. The definition items of the create new node dialog box are as follows:
● Node Number (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Node Number
The node number is a number to identify a node, which is set between 1 to 8. The default is 1.
● Dual-Redundant Power Supply (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Dual-Redundant Power Supply
Specify whether or not to make the power supply unit dual-redundant. To make the power supply unit dual-redundant, check this check box. By default, this check box is checked (dual-redundant power supply unit).
● HKU Set (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ HKU Set
Select “Yes” if you use a housekeeping unit (HKU), “No” if you do not. The default is “No.” If the air aspiration and exhaustion temperatures are 35 degrees C or more and 40 degrees C or more in the I/O Expansion Cabinet respectively, the HKU speeds up the revolution of fans to inhibit the temperature increase.
● Installation Pattern (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Installation Pattern
Select “Cabinet” or “Rack” to install nodes. The default is “Cabinet.”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-110
● Component Number (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Component Number
The component number is a number given to the cabinet to install FCS units, which is used to identify where to connect a cable. Up to 8 characters can be used for the number. No characters are entered at the default. The component number setting can be omitted.
● Node Comment (Type Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Node Comment
Up to 24 single-byte characters or 12 double-byte characters can be used for the node comment. No characters are entered at the default. The node comment setting can be omitted.
● Start Mode (Unit Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ Start Mode
This is the start mode on I/O units. Set time within 1 to 16,000 msec, or select “MAN” (manual). The default is 2000 msec. TIP This item can not be set with no I/O module defined.
SEE ALSO For the start mode on I/O units, see the following: B2.4, “Start Operation of LFCS2 and LFCS I/O Units”
● High Speed Read (Unit Tab) : LFCS2/LFCS £ ▼ High Speed Read
Select “Yes” or “No” for reading data of I/O units at high-speed. The default is “No.” TIP This item can not be set with no I/O module defined.
● Change Node Properties : LFCS2/LFCS £ Choosing a node (NODEx) then click [Properties] taskbar on [File] menu. A node Properties dialog box will appear. On this dialog box, the properties of the node can be changed. However, the node number can not be changed.
● Delete a Node : LFCS2/LFCS £ Choosing a node (NODEx) then click [Delete] taskbar on [File] menu or push the [Del] key on keyboard. A confirmation box will appear. Click [OK] on this box, the node will be deleted. However, if there is an I/O module in the node, the node can not be deleted. IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-111
F1.5.2 Creating a New I/O Module Input and output modules for the FCS can be created.
■ Creating a New I/O Module ¡ £ An I/O module can be created for the FCS selected on tree view area of System View. Choose a folder under the FCS, [IOM] can becomes available on the [Create New]. For KFCS2, KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2 or LFCS, choose an [FCS] - [IOM] - [NODExx] folder, then select [Create New] - [IOM] from [File] menu (*1). A dialog box for setting the I/O module will display. *1:
£ NODExx can be selected only on KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS/LFCS2/LFCS.
● Create New IOM Dialog Box : PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS ▼ Installation Position – Unit, Installation Position – Slot, High Speed Read, IOM Comment
There are two tabs on the Create New IOM dialog box. [Type and Position] tab and [Set Details] tab. The setting items in the tabs may very with the types of module. • Type and Position: IOM type, Installation position, dual-redundant configuration, high-speed read and IOM comment text can be specified. • Set Details:
The detailed settings of IOM can be set.
Create New IOM Type and Position Set Details IOM type Category
Multi-Point Control Analog I/O(AMN34)
Type
Multi-point control analog I/O(AMC80)
Installation position Unit
1
Slot
1
Duplicate Next Card High Speed Read IOM Comment
OK
Cancel F010503E.EPS
Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/LFCS
SEE ALSO For more information about types of I/O modules and I/O module installation about PFCS/SFCS/LFCS2/ LFCS, see General Specification (GS) for I/O Module Nest, I/O Module (for RIO) (GS 33Y06K40-31E).
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-112
• I/O module Dual-Redundant Configuration The two I/O modules installed next to each other (odd numbered slot and the odd number + 1 slot) can be configured as dual-redundant. When the option [Duplicate the next card] is checked, a dual-redundant I/O module (us IOM name Dup) will be created. If the I/O module is already in dual-redundant configuration, unchecking the option may remove the dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup). The properties of a dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup) cannot be changed. For a dual-redundant I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup), the [Type and Position] and [Set Details] tabs opened from [Properties] tab are Read-only. Changes in the source I/O module of a pair of dual-redundant I/O modules will be reflected into its mating I/O module (u-s IOM name Dup). • High Speed Read Checking the [High Speed Read] option with only one I/O module installed in one unit will enable the FCU to read from I/O module at high speed. This option is available for Package Communication modules (ACM11/ACM12) and the Fieldbus Communication module (ACF11). For Fieldbus Communication module, High Speed Read can be specified only when the number of devices communicate via that module is less than or equal to 16. SEE ALSO For more information about IOM high-speed read, see the following: • For high-speed read in PFCS, see the followings in section “■ Data Flow in Process I/O ¡ £” in C7.1.3 “Timing of Process I/O”; “● Analog Data : PFCS” “● Contact I/O Data : PFCS” • For high-speed read in SFCS/LFCS, see the followings in section “■ Data Flow in Process I/O ¡ £” in C7.1.3 “Timing of Process I/O”; “● Analog Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS £” “● Contact I/O Data : LFCS2/LFCS/SFCS £”
• IOM Comment Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 double-byte characters can be put as IOM comment text. The comment can be omitted. There is not comment text by default.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-113
● Create New IOM Dialog Box : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Installation Position – Slot, High Speed Read, IOM Comment
There are two tabs on the Create New IOM dialog box. [Type and Position] tab and [Set Details] tab. The setting items in the tabs may vary with the types of module. • Type and Position tab: IOM Type, Installation Position, Duplicate Next Card, Output Type and High Speed Read options can be selected. IOM comment text can be entered on this tab. • Set Details tab: The detailed settings of each IOM can be set on this tab. Create New IOM Type and Position
Set Details
IOM type Category
Analog Input
Type
AAV141-S (16-Channel Voltage Input)
Installation Position Slot
1
Duplicate Next Card Output Type Output in a lump
Output immediately
High Speed Read IOM Comment
OK
Cancel F010504E.EPS
Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £
SEE ALSO For more information about types of I/O modules and I/O module installation of KFCS2, KFCS, and FFCS, see General Specification (GS) for FIO System Overview(GS 33Q06Q01-31E)and Models ANB10S, ANB10D, ANR10S, ANR10D Node Units (for FIO)(GS 33Q06Q10-31E).
TIP For serial communication I/O modules, the IOM property sheet contains four tabs, Type and Position, Card Common, Port1 and Port2 tabs. Set Details tab is not displayed.
SEE ALSO For more information about the settings regarding to serial communication modules, see the following: PART-K, Subsystem Communication (Using FIO)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-114
• Duplicate Next Card The two I/O modules installed next to each other (odd numbered slot and the odd number + 1 slot) can be configured as dual-redundant. After checking the option “Duplicate Next Card,” a duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup) is created. IF uncheck this option, the duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup) will be removed. The properties of the duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup) can not be modified. The property sheet and the contents in the property sheet can not be accessed. When the original IOM is modified, the same modification will be automatically duplicated to the duplicated IOM (sIOM name Dup). SEE ALSO For information about EB401 (ER bus interface master module) dual-redundant configuration, see the following in later part of this chapter: “■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £”
• Output Type Output type can be specified to the analog input/output modules and analog output modules. Different output type makes the output to the modules or to the EB401 at different timings. Output in a lump: Output when all highest scan function blocks in the FCS complete their processing. Output immediately: Output when the connected function block is performing output process. SEE ALSO For more information about output type, see the following: “● Output Timing : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” in section “■ Timing of Process I/O £” in C7.1.3, “Timing of Process I/O”
• High Speed Read When check the option box [High Speed Read], CPU reads the data at high speed from the I/O module. However, the I/O module for communication with remote nodes, High Speed Read option is not available. SEE ALSO For more information about high speed read from the I/O modules, see the followings in section “■ Data Flow in Process I/O ¡ £” in C7.1.3, “Timing of Process I/O”: “● Analog Data : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” “● Contact I/O Data : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £”
• IOM Comment Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or up to 12 double-byte characters can be put as IOM comment text. The IOM comment can be omitted. There is not comment text by default.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-115
■ Creating a New EB401 (ER Bus Interface Master Module) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Create a new EB401 (ER bus interface master module) for connecting a remote node in a local node. While selecting the FCS folder - IOM folder - NODExx folder in the data tree section of System View, select [Create New] - [IOM] from the [File] menu. The create new IOM dialog box will be displayed: The create new IOM dialog box consists of the Type and Position tab and the Set Details tab. The definition items of the create new IOM dialog box are as follows: Create New IOM Type and Position
Set Details
IOM type Category
Remote Node Communication
Type
EB401(ER Bus Interface Master Module)
Installation Position 5
Slot
Duplicate Next Card Output Type Output in a lump
Output immediately
High Speed Read IOM Comment
OK
Cancel F010505E.EPS
Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Type and Position) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Create New IOM Type and Position
Set Details
Maximum Number of Nodes
4
Communication Protocol Constant Sending Period
Communication Basic Period
Wait for Recieving
10
msec
Node Response Timeout
12
msec
Nubmber of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout
3
time
Default OK
Cancel F010506E.EPS
Figure Create New IOM Dialog Box (Detail Setting of EB401) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-116
TIP [Output Type] and [High Speed Read] on the Type and Position tab are for display only; they can not be set.
● IOM Type (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Specify the category and type of the IOM. For Category, select [Remote Node Communication] from the list. When [Remote Node Communication] is selected for Category, [EB401 ER Bus Interface Master Module] will be entered automatically in the Type field.
● Installation Position (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Specify the number of the slot in which the EB401 will be installed. Specify an odd number. Another I/O module can not be installed in the slot at the right of the slot in which the EB401 has been installed.
● Dual-Redundant Designation (Type and Position Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Duplicate Next Card - Remote Node Communication
The ER bus can be made dual-redundant by installing two EB401 cards. Install the dealredundant EB401 card in the adjoining even slot at the right. To make the ER bus dualredundant, check [Duplicate Next Card]. When it is checked, a file named slot number EB401Dup will be created. This check box is unchecked by default.
● Maximum Number of Nodes (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Maximum Number of Nodes
Specify the maximum number of remote nodes to be connected to the EB401. Select from 2, 4 and 8. The default setting is 4.
● Communication Protocol (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Communication Protocol
Specify the communication protocol between the EB401 and the node. Select either [Constant Sending Period] or [Wait for Receiving]. The default setting is [Wait for Receiving]. Do not change the default setting unless it is necessary to do so. [Constant Sending Period] starts the next transmission at every [Communication Basic Period] even when the response to the previous transmission has not been completed. Therefore, even if one node does not respond, it will not affect the data update periods of other nodes. [Wait for Receiving] starts the next transmission only when the response to the previous transmission has been received or when [Node No Response Monitoring Time] has been reached.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-117
● Communication Basic Period (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Communication Basic Period
This item is set when [Constant Sending Period] is specified as the communication protocol. Set the communication basic period between the EB401 and the remote node within the range from 10 to 1000 msec. The default setting is 10 msec.
● Node Response Timeout (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Node Response Timeout
When the time it takes for the EB401 to start transmission until it completes reception exceeds the value set in [No Response Timeout], that node is judged to be not responding. Set the node response timeout according to the table below. If a remote node is connected via an optical repeater, add 6 milliseconds to the node response timeout as compensation for the transmission delay time due to the optical repeater. Table Node Response Timeout : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ Communication protocol
Node response timeout setting Allowable setting range
Default value
When an optical repeater is connected
Wait for Receiving
10 to 200 msec
12 msec
18 msec
Constant Sending Period
10 to communication basic period x 5
10 msec
16 msec F010507E.EPS
● Number of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout (Set Details Tab) : KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £ ▼ Number of Retries Upon Node Response Timeout
Set the number of retries for communication to a non-responding node within the range from 0 to 7 times. The default setting is 3.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-118
F1.6 Project Data Backup By making backup copies of project data, the newest project data can be protected from data loss due to hardware failures such as a disk crash.
■ Backup Tool Using Windows explorer can copy the whole project folder to an external media such as a MO or DAT, the project (all files and folders under the project folder) can be backed up. However, when backup the project to a different hard disk, or to a different PC via network, the Backup Tool introduced here is a useful program which can backup the project conveniently. The backup tool can be started from both System View and Recipe View. The backup processing started from System View and the backup processing started from Recipe View act independent of each other. The operation of the backup tool started from Recipe View is the same as the operation of the backup tool started from System View. In this section, the operation of the backup tool started from System View is explained.
■ Setting of Backup Information When using the backup function, it is necessary to set certain items of backup information (whether or not each project is to be backed up, and the backup destination if backed up) for each project first.
■ Execution of Backup Timing The backup can be made by the backup function at the following two timings. • Backup at the completion of engineering All specified project data is backed up when engineering is completed and System View is exited. • Backup at any timing specified by the user The user backs up only the project data that needs to be backed up at any timing in System View.
■ Restoring Backed up Project Data Use Windows Explorer to copy the backup data to the restore location in order to restore backed up project data.
IMPORTANT When restoring a backed up project, if the same project is still existing in the system, all data of the existing project should be deleted completely before restoring the project. Other wise, the restored data may conflict with the existing data and the whole project becomes abnormal and useless.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-119
■ Flow of Project Backup The following flowchart shows the flow of the project backup. START
Enter the name of the shared backup destination.
Set the backup information for the project data. In case of backup at the completion of engineering
Windows Explorer
Backup setting dialog box
In case of backup at any timing by the user
Select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu in System View.
Exit System View.
System View
Specify the projects to be backed up. Backup specification dialog box Execute the backup.
Check the execution status of backup.
Backup status display dialog box
END F010601E.EPS
Figure Flow of Backup
1.
Enter the name of the location where projects are to be backed up using Windows Explorer, and make sure it is shared. If the drive that is used as a backup destination is already shared, it is not necessary to perform this.
2.
Set the backup information for the projects to be backed up in the Backup setting dialog box. Project databases for which no backup information is set are excluded from the backup targets.
3.
Exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu of System View. The Backup specification dialog box is displayed in order to select the backup targets.
4.
Select the projects to be backed up in the Backup Specification dialog box.
5.
Click the [Back up] button in the Backup Specification dialog box. The backup is started. The project databases selected in the Backup specification dialog box are backed up to the chosen backup destination. During the backup executed upon exiting from System View, System View closes when the backup of all the projects is completed.
6.
The progress of the backup can be checked in the Backup Status Display dialog box. The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup Status Display dialog box.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-120
■ Setting Backup Information for Projects Set backup information for projects that are to be backed up. Project databases for which no backup information is set are excluded from the backup targets. Set the backup information in the Backup setting dialog box. Select [Set Backup] from the [Tools] menu. The Backup setting dialog box is displayed. Backup Setting Project Name
FCS backup
Backup destination
––– ––– ––– ––– –––
\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2
OK MYPJT PJT01 PJT02 PJT03 PJT04
Cancel Apply
It is backed up at the end. Project Settings Backup destination
\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0
...
Backup FCS database automatically.
F010602E.EPS
Figure Backup Setting Dialog Box
In the Backup Setting dialog box, the names of all the projects opened in System View are shown. Make the following settings for all projects to be backed up.
● Setting of whether or not to back up For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up. • If the project should be backed up :
Check the check box.
• If the project should not be backed up : Do not check the check box. TIP For newly created projects and old revision projects, the check boxes are unchecked by default.
● Backup on Closing Recipe View When the option box “It is Backed up at the end” is checked, the recipe data backup tool automatically starts when closing Recipe View. By default, this option is checked.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-121
● Setting the Backup Destination Enter the UNC (Universal Naming Convention) path of a disk where the selected projects are to be backed up. The UNC path should be entered in the format “\\computer name\storage location.” Once the backup destination is set, it is displayed in the [Backup destination] field. The drives to be used as backup destinations must be shared on the network in advance.
IMPORTANT Make sure to set [Backup destination] for projects whose check boxes showing whether or not they should be backed up are checked. In addition, network sharing must be set for backup destination drives in advance. It is necessary to set network sharing even if the backup destination is a local drive. If no backup destinations are set or drives other than the ones shared on the network are set as backup destinations, the message, “Project XXX backup destination is not set,” is displayed.
When the items mentioned above are set for all the projects to be backed up, click the [OK] button, [Apply] button, or [Cancel] button. • [OK] : The settings take effect and the Backup setting dialog box closes. • [Apply] : The settings take effect. However, the Backup setting dialog box is not closed. • [Cancel] : Cancels the settings, and the Backup setting dialog box closes. However, if the [Apply] button is clicked before [Cancel] button is clicked, the settings become valid at the time the [Apply] button is clicked.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-122
● Backup Destination Specification Dialog Box Click the [...] button of the Backup setting dialog box in order to display the Browse for Folder dialog box. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a drive and a folder can be selected as a backup destination. Browse for Folder Select Backup Destination Network Neighborhood Network Neighborhood Entire Network PC1 HIS0123 HIS0124 CS1000 CS1000PJT CTMRECP CTMRMNG OK
Cancel F010603E.EPS
Figure Browse for Folder Dialog Box
In the Browse for Folder dialog box, a list of drives on the local PC and folders in those drives is displayed. In addition, a list of PCs connected to the network is displayed. Select a drive and a folder as a backup destination from the list and click the [OK] button. The Browse for Folder dialog box is closed, and the backup destination selected in the Browse for Folder dialog box is set in the [Backup destination] field of the Backup setting dialog box. TIP •
If the [Cancel] button is clicked, the Browse for Folder dialog box is closed without setting the backup destination.
•
If a shared name was not specified for the selected backup destination, a message dialog box that displays the message, “Project XXX backup destination is not set,” appears. Click the [OK] button in the message dialog box to close the dialog box and return to the Backup destination specification dialog box.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-123
■ Execution of Backup The execute backup, exit System View or select [Start Backup] from the [Tools] menu. The Backup specification dialog is displayed. A list of the projects whose backup information is set in the Backup setting dialog box among the projects opened in System View is displayed in the Backup specification dialog box. Backup specification Project Name MYPJT PJT01 PJT02 PJT03 PJT04
Backup destination \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2
Back up Not Back up
Back up even if it is used in other PC. F010604E.EPS
Figure Backup Specification Dialog Box
In the Backup specification dialog box, set the following items for each project listed.
● Setting of whether or not to Back up For each project listed, specify whether or not it should be backed up. • If the project should be backed up :
Check the check box.
• If the project should not be backed up : Do not check the check box. Projects that are excluded from backup will not be backed up even if they are set to be backed up in the Backup setting dialog box.
● Setting whether or not to Back up even if a Project is Used in Other PCs If the [Back up even if it is used other PC] check box is checked, backup is executed for all the target project data even if they are being used by other PCs. If the [Back up even if it is used in other PC] check box is unchecked, backup is not executed for the project data that is being used by other PCs.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-124
● Execution of Backup Click the [Back up] button. The Backup specification dialog box is closed and a backup is started for all the projects chosen to be backed up. In addition, the Backup status display dialog box is displayed to show the progress of the backup. If a project to be backed up is being updated or written to by another PC, that project is not backed up. For projects that were not backed up, the message, “Project XXX has not been backed up before. Please back it up,” is displayed when System View is started next time. Moreover, if a backup fails, the message, “Project XXX has not been backed up before. Please back it up,” is also displayed when System View is started next time. If the [Not Back up] button is clicked, the Backup specification dialog box closes without executing a backup.
■ Checking the Progress of Backup When a backup is being executed, the Backup status display dialog box is displayed. Backup status display Start Project MYPJT backup.Fri Sep 26 15:10:15 2003 End Project MYPJT backup. Fri Sep 26 15:11:24 2003 Start Project PJT01 backup.Fri Sep 26 15:11:24 2003 Backup is cancelled after completing the ongoing backup. End Project PJT01 backup. Fri Sep 26 15:12:52 2003 ––ERROR =0 WARNING =0 ––
Abort
Close
Progress bar Displayed only during backup F010605E.EPS
Figure Backup Status Display Dialog Box
The progress of the backup is displayed for each project in the Backup status display dialog box. The user can stop a backup at the end of each project backup by clicking the [Abort] button. The backup is aborted at the point where the backup currently in progress is completed. In this case, any project set to be backed up after the aborted project will not be backed up. Click the [Close] button to close the Backup status display dialog. This button cannot be operated while a backup is in progress.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-125
■ Backup Processing of Project Data The files in the project folder to be backed up will be copied to the backup destination, and the files in the project folder with the same project name at the backup destination will be deleted under the following conditions: • Folder to be backed up The folders and files in the project folder will be backed up. • If the same file exists in the project folder to be backed up and at the backup destination If there is any difference between the saving date of these two files, the target file is copied to the backup destination. If not, it is not copied. • If a file or folder that is not in the project folder to be backed up exists at the backup destination That file or folder is deleted from the backup destination. • If a file or folder that exists in the project folder to be backed up does not exist at the backup destination That file or folder is copied to the backup destination.
IMPORTANT • If a backup fails for some reason during execution, execute the backup again. • Writing to the project data to be backed up from Builder cannot be performed during a backup.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-126
■ Recommended System Configuration for Backup Considering that the number of sessions will increase due to actions of the backup tool, etc., a recommended system configuration for backup that takes this increase into account is shown below. In this configuration, since the operation monitoring is executed on a different PC than the one executing the engineering, the CPU load during backup processing is lowered, thus minimizing the influence of backup processing on the operation monitoring function. In addition, the increase of the number of sessions by backup processing can be suppressed. Note that a backup is executed via Ethernet in case the backup destination is another PC.
Ethernet
Project database
PC for engineering (The backup tool is running) Backup
PC for the operation monitoring
Backup destination drive
PC on which the backup destination drive exists F010607E.EPS
Figure Recommended System Configuration for Backup
■ Number of Sessions Used for Backup The number of sessions to be used at backup is determined according to the following. Table Number of Sessions Used at Backup
Conditions
Number of sessions used
To back up engineering data on the local PC to a drive on the local PC
2
To back up engineering data on the local PC to a drive on a remote PC
1
To back up engineering data on a remote PC to a drive on a remote PC
1 F010606E.EPS
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-127
F1.7 FCS Automatic Backup By using the FCS automatic backup, you can recover the project database without performing offline download to the FCS and continue online maintenance in case of a hard disk crash in the PC on which the project database resides or similar cases. The FCS automatic backup consists of two functions, “automatic backup of FCS database” and “FCS database diagnosis.”
IMPORTANT It should be noted that if the hard disk of the PC on which the project database resides crashes during backup, the project database loses consistency and it can no longer be recovered.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-128
F1.7.1 Automatic Backup of FCS Database In order to perform online maintenance, the database within an FCS and the database within a PC must always be mutually consistent. There are, however, cases where the database within an FCS and the database within a PC may lose consistency due to hardware errors etc. For this reason, it is necessary to automatically back up the latest FCS database every time online download is performed to prevent inconsistencies between the databases. The automatic backup of FCS database function automatically backs up the FCS database within the PC (changed files only) after online download to the FCS is completed. TIP The FCS automatic backup only backs up the current project.
■ Operating Conditions The automatic backup of FCS database function operates under the following conditions. • A project must be specified as the backup target. • The backup destination must be specified. • The project attribute of the project must be current project. • The FCS automatic backup must be set to be performed.
■ Backup Destination The destination of the automatic backup of FCS database function is the same as the project backup destination explained in F1.6, “Project Data Backup”. Do not specify a removable disk such as a magneto-optic disk as the backup destination. The performance is degraded and the operability becomes lower.
■ Files Backed up with Automatic Backup of FCS Database The files in the FCS folder under the project folder and the FCS related files in the ETC folder and COMMON folder are backed up by the automatic backup of FCS database function.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-129
■ Automatic Backup Timings of FCS Database When you set the automatic backup of FCS database function, the FCS database is backed up at the following timings. • After online download is completed in FCS related builders (including FCS operations in System View) • After FCS offline download is completed • After saving the tuning parameters is completed • After all generation is completed TIP The entire project is backed up to maintain the consistency of the project if you create or delete an FCS, or change the properties of an FCS. Backing up the entire project takes some time.
■ Setting of Automatic Backup of FCS Database This section explains various settings and procedures for automatically backing up the FCS database.
IMPORTANT In order to automatically back up the FCS database, the project backup, which is explained in F1.6, “Project Data Backup” must have been set.
1.
Select [Set Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View. The Backup Setting Dialog Box appears. Backup Setting Project Name
FCS backup
Backup destination
––– ––– ––– ––– –––
\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP1 \\PC1\CSPJTBKUP2
OK MYPJT PJT01 PJT02 PJT03 PJT04
Cancel Apply
It is backed up at the end. Project Settings Backup destination
\\PC1\CSPJTBKUP0
...
Backup FCS database automatically.
F010701E.EPS
Figure Backup Setting Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
2.
F1-130
Check the [Backup FCS database automatically.] check box in the Backup setting dialog box. If you check this check box, [YES] is displayed in the [FCS backup] column of the current project in the backup target project list display area. [- - -] is always displayed for projects whose project attribute is not current project.
3.
Click the [OK] or [Apply] button in the Backup setting dialog box. The backup message dialog box appears only when you set the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time.
BKEBackUp MYPJT : FCS Database Automatic Backup was set. Do the backup of the entire project. OK F010702E.EPS
Figure Backup Message Dialog Box
Click the [OK] button in the backup message dialog box to close the backup message dialog box. Select [Start Backup...] from the [Tools] menu of System View to back up the project database only when you are setting the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time.
IMPORTANT The automatic backup of FCS database function compares the times at which files saved in the backup destination and current files were updated, and backs up only the files whose times of update are different. Back up the project data when you are setting the automatic backup of FCS database function for the first time because the file used for comparing the times of update may not exist in the backup destination. If you do not back up the project, the project cannot be recovered when errors occur in project data or it will take long to back up the project when the automatic backup of FCS database function is executed.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-131
F1.7.2 FCS Database Diagnosis Builders related to FCS save changes in the project database within a PC after online download to an FCS succeeds. At this point, the changes are reflected in several files in the project database of the FCS. If any of the files in the project database is not updated because some error occurs, the FCS database becomes inconsistent. If you continue the generation operation in this state, problems will occur that will make analysis and recovery difficult. The FCS database diagnosis is performed in order to avoid such circumstances. The FCS database diagnosis function is enabled automatically when you set the automatic backup of FCS database function. It is also possible to check for inconsistencies of the FCS database by starting the FCS database diagnosis tool from the [Tools] menu of System View.
■ FCS Database Diagnosis Error Messages The FCS database diagnosis function is automatically enabled when you set the automatic backup of FCS database function. The FCS database diagnosis function monitors that no inconsistencies occur in the project database from the completion of a successful online download operation to the completion of updating the builder files. If any inconsistency is detected in the project database, an error message indicating that an inconsistency occurred is displayed at the next generation or when starting System View. Some examples of error message displays are shown below. Mismatching of database is detected in the last generation. Computer Name:XXXX Program ID:0x2100 Project Name:MYPJT Station Name:FCS0101 Generation Time:Thu Dec 18 18:56:25 2003 File Path:\CS3000\ENG\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\DR0001.edf SEE ALSO For how to handle cases where error messages are displayed at generation or when starting System View, see the following: F1.7.3, “Project Database Error Handling”
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-132
■ FCS Database Diagnosis Tool The FCS database diagnosis tool is used to check inconsistencies of the project database. It displays diagnosis results if errors are found in the check. The FCS database diagnosis tool can only be used for projects for which the automatic backup of FCS database function is set. Moreover, the backup database must always be updated with the latest data.
● Operation Procedure of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool Follow the operation procedure below to use the FCS database diagnosis tool. 1.
Select [FCS Database Diagnosis Tool...] from the [Tools] menu of System View. The FCS database diagnosis tool starts. BKECheckFcsDB
Project Name
MYPJT
Station Name
FCS0101
Action Checks FCS database Detects difference in whole project
Start
Close F010703E.EPS
Figure FCS Database Diagnosis Tool
2.
Select the project you want to check from the [Project Name] list box.
3.
Select the FCS you want to check from the [Station Name] list box. All FCSs will be checked if you do not select a station.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
4.
F1-133
Select one of the options in the [Action] section. Select either [Checks FCS database] or [Detects difference in whole project]. By default, [Checks FCS database] is selected. If you select [Checks FCS database], the tool performs the following actions.
• It compares the project database of the specified project and the backup database to check that the project database is correct. • If the specified project is the current project, it communicates with the FCS to acquire the generation time of the FCS and compares it with the FCS database generation time of the project. • If a station name is specified, it checks the database of the target FCS. If no station name is specified, it checks the databases of all FCSs. If you select [Detects difference in whole project], the tool performs the following actions. • It compares all project databases and backup databases. If it is necessary to restore a backup database, it keeps track of changes in the project common section and databases of stations other than FCSs and uses this data for the restoration. • With this specification, the FCS database is not checked. • Even if a station name is specified, the specification of the station name will be ignored.
● Diagnosis Results of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool and Actions to be Taken The table below lists the diagnosis results of the FCS database diagnosis tool and actions to be taken. Table Diagnosis Results of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool and Actions to be Taken
Diagnosis result
Action to be taken
The project database is normal.
No action is required.
The project database is normal, but it is not backed up. Execute the backup from System View.
Backup the project database from System View.
The project database is normal, but it fails in backing up. Backup the project database from System View. Execute the backup from System View. An error is found in the project database. Restore the database.
Repair the project database.
The project database cannot be restored.
The project database cannot be repaired. F010704E.EPS
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-134
● Examples of Diagnosis Result Displays of the FCS Database Diagnosis Tool Checking MYPJT FCS0101... The project database is compared with the backup database. CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\AREADEF.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\AREADEF.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\FcsRef.rdb Thu Jul 11 10:42:43 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\FcsRef.rdb Thu Jul 09 16:52:33 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.eng Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.eng Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.fcs Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.fcs Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.odb Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\Inst0358.odb Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\InstGroup.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\InstGroup.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\IOMDEF.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\IOMDEF.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\OGDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\OGDATA.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\PRDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\PRDATA.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TagRef.rdb Thu Jul 11 10:42:44 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TagRef.rdb Thu Jul 10 16:53:45 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0200.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0100.1 Thu Jul 09 16:52:47 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0201.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:46 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\ETC\TF0101.1 Thu Jul 09 16:42:46 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\SKELTON\SFDATA.1 Thu Jul 11 10:42:45 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\SKELTON\SFDATA.1 Thu Jul 09 10:14:11 2003 CHG Project:C:\MYPJT\FCS0101\SWITCH\SwitchDef.edf Thu Jul 11 10:42:49 2003 Backup:\\PC01\HISTDB\MYPJT\FCS0101\SWITCH\SwitchDef.edf Thu Jul 09 16:52:30 2003 There is a difference between the project database and the backup database. The project database is normal, but it is not backed up. Execute the backup from System View.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-135
F1.7.3 Project Database Error Handling This section explains how to recover a project database when an error occurs in the project database in the following two cases. • When the hard disk of a PC on which a project resides crashes • When a database becomes inconsistent
■ When the Hard Disk of a PC on which a Project Resides Crashes Follow the procedure below to handle a case where the hard disk of a PC on which a project database resides crashes while not performing online downloading. 1.
Restore the backed up project database from the backup destination to a normal PC.
2.
Start the FCS database diagnosis tool and check that the FCS generation times match.
IMPORTANT Status display files are not automatically backed up, even if they are changed. Therefore, make sure to save the control drawing again if Control Drawing Builder was used for the last generation when restoring the backed up project database.
■ When a Database Becomes Inconsistent If a database becomes inconsistent during online download for some reasons, the error message “Mismatching of database is detected in the last generation.” is displayed at the next generation or when starting System View. If this message is displayed, start the FCS database diagnosis tool and check the FCS database. Specify [Checks FCS database] for [Action] of the FCS database diagnosis tool.
IMPORTANT If there are errors in the diagnosis result, disable (deselect) the [It is backed up at the end.] setting in the Backup setting dialog box and close System View. Contact YOKOGAWA service agent after that.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-136
F1.8 Software Configuration Viewer Software Configuration Viewer is a tool that displays information related to the CS 1000/CS 3000 software installed on a PC. Software Configuration Viewer has the following functions. • Displaying user names and company name • Displaying intellectual property rights, copyrights and registered trademarks included in the CS 1000/CS 3000 software • Displaying the system release number • Displaying the ID number (system ID license number) • Displaying the package names and number of licenses • Displaying installation logs • Creating a key code FD for backup • Displaying the program revisions • Displaying registry information • Printing information displayed in Software Configuration Viewer • Get Key Code List Software Configuration Viewer All
Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry
CENTUM CS 3000 Copyright(C) 2003 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Release Number :
R3.07.00
This product is licenced to the following: Suzuki YOKOGAWA ID Number :
XXXXXXXnnnnn
CENTUM is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. MELSEC-A is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation. SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation. SIEMENS and SIMANTIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd. We do not use TM or (R) mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks.
Package Model Name LBC1210-S10 LBC1220-S10 LBC1230-S10 LBC1260-S10 LBS1100-S10
Function Name Standard Bus Converter Function (For... Standard Bus Converter Function (For... Standard Bus Converter Function (For... Standard Bus Converter Function (For... Control Function for Compact Field Co...
Get All
Close
Print... F010801E.EPS
Figure Software Configuration Viewer
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-137
■ Starting Software Configuration Viewer Software Configuration Viewer can be started in the following two ways. • Select [Programs] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Software Configuration Viewer] from the [Start] menu of Windows • Select [Help] - [Version Information...] in System Viewer or a builder.
■ Tabs of Software Configuration Viewer Software Configuration Viewer contains the following tabs. • All • Install Log • Create Key Code FD • Program Information • Registry
IMPORTANT The Registry tab is displayed only when a user with the Administrator privilege is logged in. It is not displayed when a user without the Administrator privilege is logged in.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-138
Functions of each of the tabs constituting Software Configuration Viewer are explained below.
● All Tab The All tab displays the following items. • User names and company name • Intellectual property rights, copyrights and registered trademarks included in the CS 1000/CS 3000 software • System release number • System ID license number • Package names and number of licenses
● Install Log Tab The Install Log tab displays the history of installation tasks. Software Configuration Viewer All
Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry
INFO CopyFile OK! (FILES.TXT->FILES.TXT) INFO CopyFile OK! (SYSREV.TXT->SYSREV.TXT) INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3K\COMMON TO INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CentumProductInfo F INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx(SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CentumProductInfo F INFO BKCBackLaunchApp INFO BKCBackLaunchApp WARNING DeleteProgramFolder INFO RegDBGetKyeValueEx(SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session M INFO RegDBSetKyeValueEx1(SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session M WARNING BKCBackLaunchApp(C:\CS3000\INSTALL\INSTEND.EXE R3.04.0 INFO BKCBackLaunchApp(C:\CS3000\INSTALL\BKCAFTERINSTALL.EXE C DEBUG same REBOOT=COMMON DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS1100 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS4150 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS4190 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5101 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5500 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5110 DEBUG same REBOOT=LHS5170 INFO BKCBackLaunchApp INFO BKCBackLaunchApp INFO Vnet driver update. Vnet:00000303.0762 CD:R3.04.00 DEBUG CommitShardFiles OK! DEBUG path=1,cnf=1,batch_install=1 2003/9/9 10:46 ============LOG END============
Get All
Close
Print... F010802E.EPS
Figure Display Example of the Install Log Tab
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-139
● Create Key Code FD Tab The Create Key Code FD tab provides the following functions. • Creating a key code FD for backup • Putting together several key code FD created as a result of package addition and revision upgrade into one FD • Printing labels for key code FD Software Configuration Viewer All
Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry
“Create Key Code FD” is used for the following cases: -When creating backup of the Key Code FD. -When combining multiple Key Code FDs into one floppy after package additions and rev ups.
Created Key Code FD Get All
FD Label Print Close
Print... F010803E.EPS
Figure Display Example of the Create Key Code FD Tab
Follow the procedure below to create a key code FD. 1.
Click the [Create Key Code FD] button in the Create Key Code FD tab. The insert FD dialog box appears. BKCSftView Insert unused FD in drive A and choose “OK”. The content of FD is lost. OK
Cancel F010804E.EPS
Figure Insert FD Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
2.
F1-140
Insert an unused FD in drive A and click the [OK] button in the insert FD dialog box. Formatting of the FD starts and a dialog box showing the progress of the formatting appears.
Key Code FD Formatting...
F010805E.EPS
Figure FD Format Progress Dialog Box
3.
When the formatting of the FD is completed without errors, all the revision key code files and package key code files are copied from the CS 1000/CS 3000 installation disk to the FD.
4.
When copying to the FD is completed without errors, a dialog box notifying that the creation of the key code FD has been completed appears. Click the [OK] button to close the key code FD creation complete dialog box. BKCSftView Completed creating a Key Code FD.
OK F010806E.EPS
Figure Key Code FD Creation Complete Dialog Box
Click the [FD Label Print] button in the Create Key Code tab to print a label for a key code FD. A label for a key code FD is printed out. CENTUM CS 3000 Key Code FD ID Number : XXXXXXXnnnnn
2003/ 09/ 11 14 : 23: 59 F010807E.EPS
Figure Example of Key Code FD Label
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-141
● Program Info. Tab The Program Info. tab displays the detailed information of the CS 1000/CS 3000 software installed on a PC. It displays the version information and creation dates of executable modules (*.exe), drivers (*.sys) and libraries (*.dll) of the CS 1000/CS 3000 software. Software Configuration Viewer All
Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry
File Name C:\CS3000\apcs\Extmdl\libuca.dll C:\CS3000\eng\BKMTest\Extmdl\Fcs\Tif... C:\CS3000\eng\BKMTest\Extmdl\Fcs\Tif... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\MYPJT\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKProject\PJT01\FCS0... C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU... C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU... C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU... C:\CS3000\eng\BKSystem\data\FCS\CU... C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BDEVCClient.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKCLogRegist.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKECheckFcsDB.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEChPjtAttrUtilDlg... C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEConvertTagListF... C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKECvtLargeScalePj... C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEDDCopyTool.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKEFpatch.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKERDBFlagSetTool... C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKERDBtoMDB.exe C:\CS3000\eng\tool\BKESetUpUserDefFc
Build No. 303.843 303.843 303.843 303.824 303.824 303.737 303.737 303.824 303.822 303.839 303.824 303.824 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.737 303.843 303.843 303.839 303.843 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0 304.0
Get All
Date/Time Created Fri Sep 05 03:04 Fri Sep 05 03:04 Fri Sep 05 03:04 Thu Aug 07 10:5 Thu Aug 07 10:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 07 10:5 Wed Aug 06 08: Thu Aug 28 21:0 Thu Aug 07 10:5 Thu Aug 07 10:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Thu Aug 15 18:5 Fri Sep 05 02:40 Fri Sep 05 02:40 Thu Aug 28 21:0 Fri Sep 05 02:40 Thu Jul 31 18:35 Thu Jul 31 17:58 Fri Sep 05 01:22 Thu Sep 04 20:0 Thu Sep 04 20:0 Thu Sep 04 20:0 Thu Sep 04 19:5 Thu Jul 31 18:29 Thu Sep 04 20:0 Thu Sep 04 20:0 Thu Sep 04 20:0
Close
Print... F010808E.EPS
Figure Example of the Program Info. Tab
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-142
● Registry Tab The Registry tab displays names and values of registry entries set or used by the CS 1000/ CS 3000 software. Software Configuration Viewer All
Install Log Create Key Code FD Program Info. Registry
Registry \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3... \HKEY_LOCAL_MACINE\SOFTWARE\YOKOGAWA\CS3...
Value DefaultColor.reb Program\
Get All
Close
0x00000001 (1) 0x00000067 (103) 0x00000080 (128) 0x000000d9 (217) 0x00000001 (1) 0x00000058 (88) 0x00000001 (1) 0x000000d6 (214) 0x00000001 (1) 0x00000005 (5) 0x00000001 (1) 0x0000000e (14) 0x00000004 (4) 0x00000000 (0) C:\CS3000 0x00000003 (3) IM33S C:\CS3000\ENG\ C:\CS3000\ENG\ 0x00000000 (0) 0x00000000 (0) 0x0000002a (42) 0x00000000 (0)
C:\WINDOWS\not 0x00000000 (0) 0x00000000 (0)
Print... F010809E.EPS
Figure Display Example of the Registry Tab
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-143
■ Get Key Code List When adding optional packages to an existing system, or migrating CS1000 system to CS3000 system, the IDs and key codes stored in the PC need to be found. However, it would be very inconvenient for checking the IDs and key codes in numerous PCs that scattered in various locations. When using [Get All] feature, the IDs and key codes of all the PCs can be obtained in one PC. The obtained key code lists can be merged together and output into a CSV file. The key codes of the following 5 type stations can be obtained together: HIS, APCS, GSGW, SIOS and PC.
● How to Get All Key Codes 1.
Click [Get All] button on Software Configuration Viewer. Then a dialog box for getting key code list will be displayed. Get Key Code List
Project Name
MYPJT
Station List
Station HIS1001 HIS1002
EthernetHost Host1001 Host1002
Get
Add Delete
Close F010810E.EPS
Figure Get Key Code List Dialog Box
In the Get Key Code List dialog box, the stations in the current project will be displayed. The station of the current project cannot be removed from the station list.
IMPORTANT The Software Configuration Viewer of R3.06 or earlier version does not have [Get All] button. For getting all the key codes of a whole system with a version of R3.06 or earlier, please contact Yokogawa service agents.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
2.
F1-144
For getting the key code list of the stations outside the current project, click [Add] button on the Get Key Code List dialog box so as to display a dialog box for adding station.
Add Station Name Ethernet Host Name OK
Cancel F010811E.EPS
Figure Dialog Box for Adding Station
On this dialog box, the station name or the Ethernet hostname needs to be specified; either station name or Ethernet hostname will be all right. And then click [OK] button to continue. If the entered station name or the Ethernet hostname is identical with the station name or the hostname in the list, an error message will be displayed and the station cannot be added. If only the station name is entered, the Ethernet Hostname blank on the dialog box for adding station will be empty. While, only the Ethernet hostname is entered, the station name blank on the dialog box for adding station will be empty. 3.
On the Get Key Code List dialog box, a station in the list of stations can be removed from the list by choosing the station and clicking the [Delete] button. However, a station belong to the current project cannot be removed from the list.
4.
On the Get Key Code List dialog box, clicking [Get] button will start the process for getting the key codes of the listed stations. The result of the process will be displayed on the dialog box for displaying the key codes.
Display Key Code List Key LHSDM01-S11 LHS2411-S11 LHS4410-S11 LHS2410-S11
HIS1001 X X
HIS1002 X X
X
Save
Cancel
Starting to Process. HIS1001:Acquiring Keycode ..OK HIS1002:Acquiring Keycode ..OK Completed in processing.
F010812E.EPS
Figure Display Key Code List Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
5.
F1-145
To save the obtained key codes into a file, click [Save] button on the [Display Key Code List] dialog box. Then the Save As dialog box will be displayed.
Save As BKCGetKeyCodeInfo
Save in: 3
HIS1001.csv
File Name:
MergeKeyCodeList.csv
Save as Type:
*.csv
Save Cancel F010813E.EPS
Figure Save As Dialog Box
When clicking [Cancel] button on the [Display Key Code List] dialog box, the dialog box will be closed. However, if the result of obtained key codes is not saved before clicking the [Cancel] button, message will appear for confirming to save or desert the result. BKEGetKeyCodeInfo Keycode information is not saved. Save it? Yes
No
Cancel
F010814E.EPS
Figure Message for Confirmation
Clicking [Yes] on this message box, the dialog box for entering the file name will be displayed. 6.
On the dialog box for entering the file name, the file name as well as the path needs to be specified, and then click [Save] button. The file type should be CSV (*.csv) type.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-146
7.
The key codes of the stations displayed on the [Display Key Code List] dialog box will be merged and exported into a file. Microsoft Excel – _MergeKeyCodeList.csv File
Edit
View Insert
Format
Tools Data
Window
Help
ABC
I23
C
RevNo User Company IDNo StationName EthernetHostName
D
E
F
G
H
R2.00.00 R2.00.04 R2.00.02 R2.00.04 R2.00.02 R2.00.03 Taro.Y Jiro.Y Taro.Y Jiro.Y Taro.Y Taro.Y YOKOGAW YOKOGAW YOKOGAW YOKOGAW YOKOGAW YOKOGAW 11 22 33 55 66 HIS1601 HIS1602 HIS1603 HIS1604 HIS1605 HOST1601 HOST1602 HOST1603 HOST1604 HOST1605 HOST1606
KeyCode FunctionName LFS1100-S00 Control Function for Stan LFS1120-S00 Control Function for Com LFS2210-S00 FA-M3 Communication P LFS2211-S00 DARWIN Communicatio LFS9053-S00 Modbus Communication LFS9054-S00 A-B Communication Pac LFS9055-S00 Siemens Communication MergeKeyCodeList
Draw
>>
=
B A Update2005/05/31 14:31.23 ProjectName:MYPJT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
>> 11
100%
X X X X X X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X X
X X
X X X
X
X X
X
X
AutoShapes
Ready F010815E.EPS
Figure File of Merged Key Codes Microsoft Excel – _MergeKeyCodeList.csv File
Edit
View Insert
Format
Tools Data
Window
Help
ABC
I23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
>>
=
B A Update2005/05/31 14:31.23 ProjectName:MYPJT RevNo User Company IDNo StationName EthernetHostName KeyCode FunctionName LFS1100-S00 Control Function for Stan LFS1120-S00 Control Function for Com LFS2210-S00 FA-M3 Communication P LFS2211-S00 DARWIN Communicatio LFS9053-S00 Modbus Communication LFS9054-S00 A-B Communication Pac LFS9055-S00 Siemens Communication MergeKeyCodeList
Draw
>> 11
100%
C
D
E
F
G
R2.00.00 R2.00.04 R2.00.02 – – Taro.Y Jiro.Y Taro.Y YOKOGAW YOKOGAW YOKOGAW – 11 22 33 – HIS1601 HIS1602 HIS1603 HIS1604 HOST1601 HOST1602 HOST1603 HOST1604
X X X X X X X
X
X
X X X X
X X
– – – – – – –
H
R2.00.02 R2.00.03 Taro.Y Taro.Y YOKOGAW YOKOGAW 55 66 HIS1605 HOST1605 HOST1606
X X
X
X X X X
X
AutoShapes
Ready Failed to get key codes from the station F010816E.EPS
Figure File of Merged Key Codes (When a Station Failed)
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
F1-147
■ Printing Displayed Information It is possible to print the information displayed in a tab on a printer by clicking the [Print...] button provided in each tab. Perform the following steps to print an information display. 1.
Click [Print...] button. The Create Report dialog box appears.
Create Report
Range Current Tab
All Tabs
Output Destination Printer Normally
File Clipboard
OK
Cancel F010817E.EPS
Figure Create Report Dialog Box
2.
Select one of the options in the [Range] section. By default, [Current Tab] is selected.
• If you select [Current Tab], only the information displayed in the currently displayed tab is printed. • If you select [All Tabs], the information displayed in all tabs except for the Create Key Code FD tab of Software Configuration Viewer is printed out sequentially. If you select [All Tabs], the information of the Registry tab is printed out even if the user currently logged in does not have the Administrator privilege. 3.
Select one of the options in the [Output Destination] section. By default, [Printer Normally] is selected.
• If you select [Printer Normally], the information is printed to the printer specified as “printer to be used normally” for the PC. On each page, the date and time of printing and a sequential page number starting from 1 are added as the header and footer, respectively. • If you select [File], the Window’s standard Save As dialog box appears. Specify the file name and saving destination and save the information. The default file name and extension is “cssoft.txt.” • If you select [Clipboard], the information is copied to the clipboard. It is then possible to paste the information into another application to edit the text. 4.
If you selected [Printer Normally] or [Clipboard] for [Output Destination], click the [OK] button in the Create Report dialog box. Printing to the specified destination is started.
IM 33S01B30-01E 13th Edition : Dec.26,2005-00
Blank Page
F2-1
F2. Engineering Common Items This chapter describes the following items that are common to the engineering function: • Names • Comments • File types • Structure of folders and files • External files
■ Names The names are identifications of the system elements such as function blocks or windows created by the System Builders.
■ Comments The comments are descriptions attached to the function blocks or windows created by the System Builders.
■ File Types There are three types of files handled by the System Builders; builder files, SVA files, and working files.
■ Structure of Folders and Files Engineering data is structured for each project. Creating a project will create a project folder, the project-common folders and station folders will be created under that project folder. Folders and builder files are further created under these folders.
■ External Files The defined builder file can be saved into an external file in a format different from the builder file format. This operation is referred to as export. CS 1000/CS 3000 can import the external files including SVA files exported from other projects, or other stations for reuse. This operation is referred to as import.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-2
F2.1 Names The names are identifications of the system elements used for engineering and operation monitoring purpose such as function blocks or windows created by the System Builders. This paragraph explains the following names. • Window names • Tag names • P&ID tag names • User-defined labels
■ Window Names Each window has a window name that is specific to the system. When a window name is entered into the System Message window call dialog box, the window can be called up. In addition to the window names provided by the system, there are windows to which the names can be defined by the user.
● Window Names Provided by the System The table below indicates the format of the window names provided by the system. Window type
Window name
Remarks
Operator Guide window
.OG
When calling up window, search conditions can be specified
Process Alarm window
.AL
When calling up window, search conditions can be specified
Process Report window
.PR
When calling up window, search conditions can be specified
Historical Message Report window
.HR
When calling up window, search conditions can be specified
System Status Overview window
.SO
-
System Alarm window
.SA
-
FCS Status Display window
.SF
-
HIS Setup window
.SH
-
Help dialog box
.HW
Image window
.IM
When calling up dialog box, search conditions can be specified F020101E.EPS
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-3
● User-Definable Window Names ▼ Window Name, Help, Help Message Number
• Graphic Window, Trend Window For a user-definable window, such as a Graphic window or a Trend window, the user can define the window name freely. Do not use duplicate window names in the same project. A user-defined window name is a string with up to 16 alphanumeric characters (capital letters only for the English alphabet), [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen). However, a [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen) may not be placed at the beginning of a userdefined window name. The following is an example of a user-defined window name.
GRREACTORA
• Help Dialog There are system-fixed help dialog and user-definable help dialog for defining help message. The user-definable help dialog messages are treated as dialog names that may be specified as HW0001 to HW9999.
■ Tag Names ¡ £ The control station function blocks and control elements are assigned with tag names for identification. HIS uses the tag names to identify operation and monitoring targets such as calling up a function block. The tag names are also used in sequence tables and arithmetic expressions to represent the corresponding function blocks. One tag name only represents one function block. Do not define duplicate tag names in one project. There are two types of tag names: user-defined tag names and system tag names.
● User-Defined Tag Names ▼ Tag Name
Tag names may be defined by users. A user defined tag name is a string up to 16 alphanumeric characters (capital letters only for the English alphabet), [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen). However, a [ _ ] (underscore) and [-] (hyphen) may not be placed at the beginning of a tag name. Here is an example of a tag name: Example:
FIC1000
IMPORTANT For the tag name used in the arithmetic expression of a general-purpose calculation block or a SEBOL, if it is started with a numeric character or if it contains a "-" (hyphen) character, an error will occur during compilation. Thus, it is necessary to use the alias statement to declare the a new tag name, which started with an alphabet character and contains no hyphen, and then use the alias in the arithmetic expression of a general-purpose calculation block or a SEBOL.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-4
● System Tag Names : PFCS ¡ These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HIS using the following formats. Table Formats of System Tag Name : PFCS ¡ Type
Format
Example
Common switch
%SWxxxxSddaa
%SW311S0102
Global switch(*1)
%GSyyyaaSddmm
%GS01201S0101
Annunciator Message
%ANxxxxSddaa01
%AN23S010301
Process I/O
%Z01usccSddaa
%Z011201S0101
Communication I/O
%WBxxxxbbSddaa
%WB101201S0102
Function Block
%BLxxxxSddaa01
%BL0125S010201 F020102E.EPS
Note: xxxx: S: dd: aa: yyy: mm: u: s: cc: bb: *1:
%SW, %GS, %AN, %Z, %WB, %BL: Type code indicating an element type Element number (serial) Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed) Domain Number Station number(01 to 24) Element number (001 to 256) Station number (01 to 24) Unit number (1 to 5) Slot number (1 to 4) Terminal number (01 to 32) Bit number (01 to 16) The global switches are available for enhanced type PFCS but not available for standard type PFCS.
● System Tag Names : PFCS/SFCS £ These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HIS using the following formats. Table Formats of System Tag Name : PFCS/SFCS £ Type
Format
Example
Common switch
%SWxxxxSddaa
%SW311S0102
Global switch(*1)
%GSyyyaaSddmm
%GS01201S0101
Annunciator Message
%ANxxxxSddaa01
%AN23S010301
Process I/O
%Z01usccSddaa
%Z011201S0101
Communication I/O
%WBxxxxbbSddaa
%WB101201S0102
Function Block
%BLxxxxSddaa01
%BL0125S010201 F020103E.EPS
Note: xxxx: S: dd: aa: yyy: mm: u: s: cc: bb: *1:
%SW, %GS, %AN, %Z, %WB, %BL: Type code indicating an element type Element number (serial) Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed) Domain Number Station number(01 to 64) Element number (001 to 256) Station number (01 to 64) Unit number (1 to 5) Slot number (1 to 4) Terminal number (01 to 32) Bit number (01 to 16) The global switches are available for enhanced type PFCS and SFCS but not available for standard type PFCS.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F2-5
● System Tag Names : LFCS2/LFCS £ These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HIS using the following formats. Table Formats of System Tag Name : LFCS2/LFCS £ Type
Format
Example
Common switch
%SWxxxxSddaa
%SW311S0102
Global switch
%GSyyyaaSddmm
%GS01201S0101
Annunciator Message
%ANxxxxSddaa01
%AN23S010301
Process I/O
%ZnnusccSddaa
%Z011201S0101
Communication I/O
%WBxxxxbbSddaa
%WB101201S0102
Function Block
%BLxxxxSddaa01
%BL0125S010201 F020104E.EPS
Note: xxxx: S: dd: aa: yyy: mm: nn: u: s: cc: bb:
%SW, %GS, %AN, %Z, %WB, %BL: Type code indicating an element type Element number (serial) Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed) Domain Number (01 to 16) Station number(01 to 64) Element number (001 to 256) Station number (01 to 64) Node number (01 to 08) Unit number (1 to 5) Slot number (1 to 4) Terminal number (01 to 32) Bit number (01 to 16)
● System Tag Names : KFCS2/KFCS £ These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HIS using the following formats. Table Formats of System Tag Name : KFCS2/KFCS £ Type
Format
Example
Common switch
%SWxxxxSddaa
%SW311S0102
Global switch
%GSyyyaaSddmm
%GS01201S0101
Annunciator Message
%ANxxxxSddaa01
%AN23S010301
Process I/O
%ZnnusccSddaa
%Z011101S0101
Communication I/O
%WBxxxxbbSddaa
%WB101201S0102
Function Block
%BLxxxxSddaa01
%BL0125S010201 F020105E.EPS
Note: xxxx: S: dd: aa: yyy: mm: nn: u: s: cc: bb:
%SW, %GS, %AN, %Z, %WB, %BL: Type code indicating an element type Element number (serial) Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed) Domain Number (01 to 16) Station number (01 to 64) Element number (001 to 256) Station number (01 to 64) Node number (01 to 10) For the “Remote Node Expanded” database type of KFCS2, Node Number 01 to 15. Slot number (1 to 8) Fixed to 1 for all I/O modules except ALF111. For ALF111, uses segment number 1 to 4. Terminal number (01 to 64) Bit number (01 to 16)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F2-6
● System Tag Names : FFCS £ These are name formats provided by the system. The user can call up an element to HIS using the following formats. Table Formats of System Tag Name : FFCS £ Type
Format
Example
Common switch
%SWxxxxSddaa
%SW311S0102
Global switch
%GSyyyaaSddmm
%GS01201S0101
Annunciator Message
%ANxxxxSddaa01
%AN23S010301
Process I/O
%ZnnusccSddaa
%Z011101S0101
Communication I/O
%WBxxxxbbSddaa
%WB101201S0102
Function Block
%BLxxxxSddaa01
%BL0125S010201 F020106E.EPS
Note: xxxx: S: dd: aa: yyy: mm: nn: u: s: cc: bb:
%SW, %GS, %AN, %Z, %WB, %BL: Type code indicating an element type Element number (serial) Identifier indicating the domain number and the station number (fixed) Domain Number (01 to 16) Station number(01 to 64) Element number (001 to 256) Station number (01 to 64) Node number (01 to 04) The FCU of the FFCS is fixed at node number 01. This cannot be changed. Expanded nodes (local nodes and remote nodes) are assigned 02 and succeeding numbers. Slot number (1 to 8) Fixed to 1 for all I/O modules except ALF111. For ALF111, uses segment number 1 to 4. Terminal number (01 to 32) Bit number (01 to 16)
■ P&ID Tag Names ▼ P&ID Tag Name
P&ID tag names are the names used on the Process Instrumentation Diagrams. In CS 1000, they are used as comment texts to remark their relationship with the tags on the Process Instrumentation Diagrams. P&ID tag names are not displayed in the window.
■ User-Defined Labels ▼ Label
User-defined labels are names that can be defined for the analog process I/O and for messages. These labels can be used when defining the process I/O connections, the function block connections, sequence tables and arithmetic expressions. User-defined label may be defined up to 16 alphanumeric characters. The format for a user-defined label is given as below. %%Mn ...n %%: Fixed in the system M: Alphabet character in capital n ...n: Alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0 to 9) up to 13 characters.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F2-7
F2.2 Comment The comments are descriptions attached to the function blocks, windows, and builder files. It is helpful by using the attached comments to identify the function blocks and windows during operation and monitoring. There are three types of comments: tag comment, window comment and file comment. The defined comment is displayed in the comment column together with the file on System View. Moreover, the defined comment may be printed out by the self-documentation function.
■ Tag Comment ▼ Tag Comment
An explanatory description for each function block can be defined with up to 24 single-byte characters or 12 double-byte characters. The tag comment may be defined on the Control Drawing Builder and Function Block Overview Builder or the Function Block Detail Builder. The defined tag comment is displayed in the window along with the tag name.
■ Window Comment ▼ Window Comment, Help Message Comment
An explanatory description for each user-defined window can be defined with up to 24 single-byte characters or 12 double-byte characters. The window comment is defined on the property sheet for the window. The comment may be added to the following types of user-defined windows: • Graphic windows • Help dialog box
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-8
■ File Comment ▼ Drawing Comment, Trend Block Comment
The comment may be added to the user-defined builder files. The file comment may be entered on the builder menu or the files’ properties sheet. The number of characters limited to the comment added to the builder files are as follows. • Control drawing Up to 80 alphanumeric characters or 40 double-byte characters. • Function block list Up to 80 alphanumeric characters or 40 double-byte characters. • SEBOL user function Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • SFC sequence Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Unit procedure Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • IOM file Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Common block Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Window shortcut Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Trend acquisition pen assignment Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Trend display pen assignment Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Help window Up to 24 alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. • Control drawing status display file File comments added to the control drawing builder are automatically added to the control drawing status display file. • Logic chart status display file Tag comments added to the logic chart block are automatically added to the logic chart status display file as file comments.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-9
F2.3 File Types There are three types of files that may be handled by the builders for building the Operation and Monitoring Functions and the FCS Control Functions. • Builder file (file extension .edf) • SVA file (file extension .sva) • Working file (file extension .wkf)
■ Builder File The master files handled by the builder are referred to as builder files. The extension for builder file is .edf.
■ SVA File When the defined contents on the builder have errors, the builder file can not be saved with the Save command or downloaded. To save a file with an error, use the Save As command on the file menu. The file’s extension should be .sva. The file saved with the extension .sva may be imported on the builder for editing.
■ Working File During editing of a builder file, the file may be saved as a working file. The file extension of working file is .wkf. A working file can be created even if an error exists in the contents defined on the builder. The working files may be saved when working on the following builders. • State Transition Matrix Builder • FCS Constants Builder • Global Switch Builder • Common Switch Builder • Annunciator Builder • Signal Event Builder • Operator Guide Builder • Printout Message Builder • FCS Sequence Library Builder (SEBOL User Function) • FCS Sequence Library Builder (SFC Sequence) • FCS Sequence Library Builder (Unit Procedure) • Control Drawing Builder • Function Block Overview Builder • Function Block Detail Builder • Graphic Builder (except for status display) • Taglist Builder (Tag Name)
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-10
● Creating a Working File When the contents of a builder is saved as a working file, the working file will be created in the same directory as the builder file. When the working file is created, the original file is intact as the builder file. If a working file for the same object already exists, saving the contents of the working file will overwrite the original contents without any warning message for confirmation.
Create a working file on the builder.
Builder file
Working file
The editing result will not be saved into the builder file.
A working file is createdfor storing the editing result. F020301E.EPS
Figure Process Flow when Creating a Working File
● Deleting a Working File If downloading or saving the currently edited builder file is completed successfully, the working file will be removed from the same directory of the builder file. Note that when off-line downloading the builder files to an FCS in System View, the working file will not be downloaded or removed.
Click [Save] on [File] menu on the builder.
Builder file
Working file
The defined contents will be saved into the builder file.
The working file will be removed. F020302E.EPS
Figure Process Flow when Saving a Builder File IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-11
● Editing a Working File If both a working file and a builder file exist for the same builder object, when the builder starts, a dialog box will be displayed asking the user to select one of these files for editing. When selecting a working file, the working file will be automatically imported as the builder file for editing. The is automatically performed and there is no further indication to show that the working file is being edited.
Start the builder.
Builder file Select a working file or a builder file in the dialog box. Working file
Edit the file selected in the dialog box.
F020303E.EPS
Figure Process Flow when Starting the Builder
● Printing a Working File The self-documentation function can only print out the builder files. If it is required to print out the working files, the working files may be printed out individually from the builder of each editing object.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-12
■ Working Files for Function Blocks To define function blocks on the function block builder, the definition may be performed on Function Block Overview Builder, Function Block Detail Builder and Control Drawing Builder. This section describes how these builders handle the function block working files.
● Creating a Working File on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder When creating working files on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder, the working files for a drawing file (DRnnnn.wkf) and the function blocks being changed (tag name.wkf) will be created.
Create working files on the Function Block Overview Builder or the Control Drawing Builder.
DRnnnn.edf
DRnnnn.wkf
TagA.edf
TagA.wkf
TagB.edf
TagB.wkf
• • • The editing result will not be saved into the builder file.
• • • Create a working file to save the editing result. F020304E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Creating Working Files on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-13
● Saving the Builder Files on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder with the Save Function When saving the builder file on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder, the working files for the drawing file (DRnnnn.wkf) and the function blocks being changed (tag name.wkf) will be removed automatically.
Save working files on the Function Block Overview Builder or the Control Drawing Builder by clicking [Save].
DRnnnn.edf
DRnnnn.wkf
TagA.edf
TagA.wkf
TagB.edf
TagB.wkf
• • • The editing result will be saved into the builder file.
• • • The working files will be removed. F020305E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Removing the Working Files on Function Block Overview Builder or Control Drawing Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-14
● Creating Working Files on Function Block Detail Builder When creating working files on Function Block Detail Builder, the contents of the function blocks being currently edited will be saved into working files (tag name.wkf). This operation does not create a working file (DRnnnn.wkf) for the drawing’s builder file (DRnnnn.edf). Even if a working file for the drawing already exists, this operation does not change the file.
Create working files on the Function Block Detail Builder.
The working file for the drawing will not be created.
DRnnnn.edf
DRnnnn.wkf
TagA.edf
TagA.wkf
The editing result will not be saved into the builder file.
Create a working file to save the editing result. F020306E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Creating a Working File on Function Block Detail Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-15
● Saving the Builder Files on Function Block Detail Builder When saving the builder file on Function Block Detail Builder, the working files for an function blocks (tag name.wkf) will be removed automatically. The drawing file (DRnnnn.edf) and the working file (DRnnnn.wkf) for the drawing will not be removed.
Save the builder file on the Function Block Detail Builder by clicking [Save].
DRnnnn.edf
DRnnnn.wkf
TagA.edf
TagA.wkf
The editing result will be saved into the builder file.
Only the working file for the function block will be removed. F020307E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Removing the Working File for a Function Block on Function Block Detail Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-16
● When Starting Control Drawing Builder When starting Control Drawing Builder from System View, a dialog box will be displayed for selecting a working file (.wkf) or a builder file (.edf) if both types of files exist for the same drawing. The editing may be performed on the selected files for function blocks.
Start the Control Drawing Builder from System View.
DR0001.edf
DR0001.wkf
TagA.edf Select a builder file or a working file in the dialog box. TagA.wkf
TagB.edf
TagB.wkf
• • • The Control Drawing Builder is started.
F020308E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Starting the Control Drawing Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-17
● When Starting the Function Block Detail Builder from System View When starting the Function Block Detail Builder from System View, a dialog box will be displayed for selecting a working file (.wkf) or a builder file (.edf) if both types of files exist. The editing may be performed on the selected files for function blocks.
Start the Function Block Detail Builder from System View. DR0002.edf
TagA.edf Select a builder file or a working file in the dialog box. TagA.wkf
The Function Block Detail Builder is started.
F020309E.EPS
Figure Illustration of Starting the Function Block Detail Builder
IMPORTANT The working files (.wkf) for function block to be edited on the Function Block Detail Builder started from System View must be those for the function blocks already defined in the drawing’s builder file (DRnnnn.edf), and the tag name and the model of the function block must be the same. If the tag name or the function block’s model does not correspond to those in the drawing’s builder file, the working file (.wkf) cannot be imported on the Function Block Detail Builder. In the case like this, it must be started from the Control Drawing Builder. The discrepancies of the tag name or function block model name between the working file and builder file may be caused by creating a working file (.wkf) after changing the model or the tag name of the function block without saving the change into the builder file.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-18
● When Starting Function Block Detail Builder from the Control Drawing Builder When starting the Function Block Detail Builder from the Control Drawing Builder, the function block files to be edited on the Function Block Detail Builder will be the files being edited on the Control Drawing Builder.
DR0001.edf Start the Control Drawing Builder from System View. DR0001.wkf
TagA.edf Select a builder file or a working file in the dialog box. TagA.wkf
TagB.edf
TagB.wkf The Control Drawing Builder is started.
The Function Block Detail Builder is started from the control drawing builder.
The Function Block Detail Builder is started. TagA.edf and TagB.wkf are selected as editing objects. F020310E.EPS
Figure Editing Objects on the Function Block Detail Builder Started from Control Drawing Builder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-19
IMPORTANT On the Function Block Detail Builder started from the Control Drawing Builder, the working file can not be created.
● Handling of the Tuning Parameters when Importing the Working File When saving the working file (.wkf) imported into the builder file (.edf), for the function blocks for which both tag name and model name correspond in both types of files, the latest tuning parameters saved on the builder file will be applied. For the function blocks for which only a tag name correspond in both types of files, only the parameters available for the function blocks are applied.
● Online Download If a working file is imported as the builder file, only the changed part of the function blocks will be downloaded online.
■ Use of SVA Files and Working Files SVA files (.sva) and working files (.wkf) may be used in the following situations.
● SVA Files • When Graphic Builder is started alone. • When saving a working file on the builders that do not support working file. • When passing the engineering data among users or among projects.
● Working Files A working file should be used only to save builder contents currently edited. For the purpose of passing data to other users or other projects, an SVA file should be used instead of a working file.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-20
F2.4 Structure of Folders and Files This chapter explains the structure of folders and files as well as the method of engineering of the folders and files.
■ Location of Project ¡ £ Engineering data are stored in the unit of project. When creating a new project on System View, a drive name and a folder name should be designated for the project. The default location of the project folder is shown as follows. • C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\ (*1) • C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\ (*2) *1: *2:
¡ The default location in CS 1000 system. £ The default location in CS 3000 system.
On System View, the files and subfolders under the project folder can be displayed.
■ Structure of Project Folder ¡ £ Structure of a project folder is shown in the following figure. Project Name
COMMON
BATCH
FCS{dd} {nn}
HIS{dd} {nn}
BCVV{dd} {nn}
(*1)
BCVH{dd} {nn}
(*1)
Legend: Folder Builder File
BCVL{dd} {nn} dd: Domain Number nn: Station Number ACG{dd} {nn}
STN{dd} {nn} F020401E.EPS
Figure Structure of Project Folder ¡ £ *1:
£ Available only in CS 3000.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-21
● Structure of COMMON Folder Legend:
COMMON
Folder CustomPlant.edf
Plant Hierarchy Builder File
StnConf.edf
Station Configuration
UserSec.edf
Security
OpeMarkDef.edf
m : State Transition Matrix
Operation Mark
EngUnit.edf
Engineering Unit Symbol
InstLabel.edf
Switch Position Label
SysStsLabel.edf
System Fixed Status Character String
BlkStsLabel.edf
Block Status Character String
AlmStsLabel.edf
Alarm Status Character String
AlmTbl.edf
Alarm Processing Table
AlmPri.edf
Alarm Priority
StsChange.edf
Status Change Command Character String
MATRIX Matrix {m}.edf
State Transition Matrix F020402E.EPS
Figure Structure of COMMON Folder
● Structure of BATCH Folder Legend: BATCH
Folder BatchCnf.edf UnitCommonBlk.edf
Process Management Configuration
Builder File nnnn : Common Block Number nn : Recipe Group Number
Unit Common Block
COMMON_BLOCK RDT {nnnn}.edf
Common Block
TrainName.edf
Train
ProductWnd.edf
Product Control
RG {nn}
F020403E.EPS
Figure Structure of BATCH Folder
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-22
● Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS Legend:
FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder CONFIGURATION
Builder File StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
Equipment
dd: nn: u: s: mmmm:
Domain Number Station Number Unit Number Slot Number Control Drawing Number
SEQ_LIBRARY SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Seguence Name".edf
SFC Seguence
"Seguence Name".edf
UNIT Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
IOM {u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf
IOM
SWITCH SwitchDef.edf CommDataWW.edf
1
Common Switch Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag F020404E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS (1/2)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F2-23
Legend:
1
Folder Builder File
MESSAGE SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
nn: Station Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display F020416E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : PFCS (2/2)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F2-24
● Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS £ Legend:
FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder CONFIGURATION
Builder File StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY
dd: nn: u: s: mmmm:
Domain Number Station Number Unit Number Slot Number Control Drawing Number
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
IOM {u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf
IOM
SWITCH
2
SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag F020405E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-25
2
MESSAGE SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display Legend: Folder Builder File nn: Station Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020406E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : SFCS (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-26
● Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS £ Legend: FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder Builder File
CONFIGURATION StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY
dd: nn: n: u: s: mmmm:
Domain Number Station Number Node Number Unit Number Slot Number Control Drawing Number
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
IOM NODE {n} {u} - {s}"IOM Name".edf
IOM
SWITCH
3
SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag F020407E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef 4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E 10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F2-27
3
MESSAGE SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display Legend: Folder Builder File nn: Station Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020408E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : LFCS2/LFCS (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-28
● Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS £ Legend:
FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder CONFIGURATION
Builder File StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
dd: nn: n: s: p: mmmm:
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY
Domain Number Station Number Node Number Slot Number Port Number Control Drawing Number
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
IOM NODE {n} {s}"IOM Name".edf
IOM
{s}"IOM Name" {s}"IOM Name"-{p}".edf
ALF111
SWITCH
4
SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag F020412E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-29
4
MESSAGE SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display Legend: Folder Builder File nn: Station Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020413E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : KFCS2/KFCS (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-30
● Structure of FCS Folder : FFCS £ Legend:
FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder CONFIGURATION
Builder File StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
dd: nn: n: s: p: mmmm:
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY
Domain Number Station Number Node Number Slot Number Port Number Control Drawing Number
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
IOM NODE {n} {s}"IOM Name".edf
IOM
{s}"IOM Name" {s}"IOM Name"-{p}".edf
ALF111
SWITCH
5
SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag F020417E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : FFCS (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-31
5
MESSAGE SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display Legend: Folder Builder File nn: Station Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020418E.EPS
Figure Structure of FCS Folder : FFCS (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-32
● Structure of APCS Folder £ Legend: FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder Builder File
CONFIGURATION StnDef.edf
dd:Domain Number nn:Station Number
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
SWITCH SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag
SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
MESSAGE
6
F020414E.EPS
Figure Structure of APCS Folder (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-33
6
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display
APPLICATION Package Name SIM FCS-C Task Legend: USER CUSTOM Folder Builder File mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020415E.EPS
Figure Structure of APCS Folder (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-34
● Structure of GSGW Folder £ Legend:
FCS {dd} {nn}
Folder CONFIGURATION
Builder File StnDef.edf
FCS Constants
Equipment.edf
dd:Domain Number nn:Station Number
Equipment
SEQ_LIBRARY SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION "User Function Name".edf
SEBOL User Function
SFC_SEQUENCE "Sequence Name".edf
SFC Sequence
"Sequence Name".edf
Unit Procedure
UNIT_PROCEDURE
SWITCH SwitchDef.edf
Common Switch(*1)
CommDataWW.edf
Communication I/O
GSwitchDef.edf
Global Switch
WBTagDef.edf
Communication I/O Tag
SD {nn} 01.edf
Printout Message
AN {nn} 01.edf
Annunciator
OG {nn} 01.edf
Operator Guide
EV {nn} 01.edf
Signal Event
MESSAGE
7
F020419E.EPS
Figure Structure of GSGW Folder (1/2) £ *1:
As for common switch files, SwitchDef2 to SwitchDef4 are available besides SwitchDef, each file is for defining 1000 common switches. For example, common switches %SW0001 to %SW1000 are defined in the file SwitchDef, while the common switches %SW1001 to %SW2000 are defined in file SwitchDef2.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-35
7
FUNCTION_BLOCK DR {mmmm}.edf
Function Block Overview or Control Drawing
DR {mmmm} "Tag Name".edf
Function Block Detail
DISPLAY DR {mmmm}.dsp
Status Display
LOGICCHART "Tag Name".dsp
Logic Chart Status Display Legend: Folder Builder File mmmm: Control Drawing Number F020420E.EPS
Figure Structure of GSGW Folder (2/2) £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-36
● Structure of HIS Folder ¡ HIS {dd} {nn}
CONFIGURATION OpeconDef.edf
HIS Constants
Scheduler.edf
Scheduler
MsgReqDef.edf
Sequence Message Request Function
TR {rrrr}.edf
Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment
Funckey.edf
Function Key Assignment Window Name or Window hierarchies can be defined freely
WINDOW GR0001 GR0001.edf
Graphic
TG0101 TG0101.edf
Trend Display Pen Assignment
OV0001 OV0001.edf
Legend:
Graphic
Folder
CG0001 CG0001.edf
Builder File
Graphic dd: nn: rrrr: hhhh:
HELP HW {hhhh}.edf
Domain Number Station Number Trend Block Number Help Number
Help F020409E.EPS
Figure Structure of HIS Folder ¡
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-37
● Structure of HIS Folder £ HIS {dd} {nn}
CONFIGURATION OpeconDef.edf
HIS Constants
Scheduler.edf
Scheduler
MsgReqDef.edf
Sequence Message Request Function
TR {rrrr}.edf
Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment
Funckey.edf
Function Key Assignment
PanelSet.edf Funckey.edf
Panl Set Window Name or Window hierarchies can be defined freely
WINDOW GR0001 GR0001.edf
Graphic
TG0101 TG0101.edf
Trend Display Pen Assignment
OV0001 OV0001.edf
Legend:
Graphic (Overview)
Folder
CG0001 CG0001.edf
Graphic (Control Group)
HELP HW {hhhh}.edf
Builder File dd: nn: rrrr: hhhh:
Domain Number Station Number Trend Block Number Help Number
Help F020410E.EPS
Figure Structure of HIS Folder £
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-38
● Structure of STN Folder An example of the folder holding the tag lists of other type stations is structured as follows. When the tag list does not exist in the folder, only the STN folder will be displayed. STN{dd} {nn}
TAGLIST OGDATA.edf
Tag-List Generation (Operation Guide Message)
PRDATA.edf
Tag-List Generation (Printout Message)
SMDATA.edf
Tag-List Generation (Sequence Message)
TFDATA.edf
Tag-List Generation (Tag Name) Legend: Folder Builder File dd: Domain Number nn: Station Number F020411E.EPS
Figure An example of Structure of STN Folder
TIP The folder structure and builder file structure of other stations varies with types of stations.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-39
F2.5 Utilization of External Files This chapter explains how to save the builder files with other names for export. And also explains how to import the builder files created in other projects or other station folders.
IMPORTANT The text files exported from builders and the exported text files ready for importing to the builders should not be edited. The text files created by users should not be imported.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-40
F2.5.1 Export The defined builder file can be saved into different types of files. This operation is referred to as Export. The types of files can be exported are shown as follows, however, it varies with the types of builders. • CSV file • Text file
■ Procedure for Export Operation The operation procedure of Export is shown as follows. 1.
Activate the builder, then choose [External File] - [Export..] on [File] menu, a dialog box will appear.
Export Save in :
My Computer
31/2 Floppy (A:) (C:) (D:) (E:)
Save
File name : Save as type :
Text File (*.txt)
Cancel F020510E.EPS
Figure Export Dialog Box
2.
Specify the path, name of the file and the type of file.
3.
Then click [Save] button, the file will be exported.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-41
F2.5.2 Import The contents of other CS 1000/CS 3000 projects and the builder files created in other CS 1000/CS 3000 projects can be duplicated and used for the current project. This operation is referred to as Import. The types of files may be imported are shown as follows, however, the types of files vary with types of builders. • Builder files • SVA files • CSV files • Text files • Status display files • Converted files
IMPORTANT The files can be imported are the files exported from other CS 1000/CS 3000 projects or other stations. The CENTUM CS control drawing and graphic source files can be imported on CS 1000/ CS 3000 Control Drawing Builder and Graphic Builders. SEE ALSO For more information about importing various CENTUM CS source files, see the following chapters: • For importing CENTUM CS source files on Control Drawing Builder; F3.23, “Importing CS Source File” • For importing CENTUM CS source files on Graphic Builder; F12.16, “Importing CS Source Files”
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-42
■ Operation Procedure of Import Follow the procedures below for the Import operation. When import the data of function blocks or graphics, the files for import must be created.
IMPORTANT Data can be imported in the unit of file, builder information can not be partially imported as a part of file.
1.
Activate the builder, then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of the builder. Import dialog box may pop-out.
Import Look in :
My Computer
31/2 Floppy (A:) (C:) (D:) (E:)
Open
File name : File of type :
Cancel
Builder File (*.edf)
F020501E.EPS
Figure Import Dialog Box
2.
Then specify the name and type of file to be imported.
SEE ALSO About the location of builder files, see the following: F2.4, “Structure of Folders and Files”
3.
After clicking the [Open] button, a dialog box appears to prompt for confirmation.
FCS Constants Builder Current information will be lost. Import ?
Yes
No F020502E.EPS
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box
4.
Click [Yes] may import the file.
5.
Then download the file after. The internal builder file will be replaced only when downloading is completed properly.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-43
■ How the Tuning Parameters be Handled when Import When import builder files (*.edf) SVA files (*.sva), CSV files (*.csv), Text files (*.txt) on Function Block Overview Builder, Control Drawing Builder and Function Block Detail Builder, the tuning parameters are handled as follows.
● When Importing a Builder File The existing parameters will be replaced by the parameters imported together with the builder file.
● When Importing a SVA File The existing parameters will be replaced by the parameters imported together with the SVA file.
● When Importing a CSV File The existing parameters will be lost and the built-in system default parameters will be used.
● When Importing a Text File The existing parameters will be lost and the built-in system default parameters will be used.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-44
■ Examples of Import Operation ¡ £ Examples for importing function block, Control Drawing Builder and window hierarchy files are indicated as follows.
● An Example of Function Block Import ¡ £ Builder files of function block made on System View are located in the following directories, the file name format is “TagName .edf.” • C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\(*1) • C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\(*2) *1: *2:
¡ The default location in CS 1000 system. £ The default location in CS 3000 system.
C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\:
Directory for the project
C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\:
Directory for the project
Mypjt:
Project name
Fcs0101:
Control station name
Dr0001:
Control drawing name
The path of the corresponding project, the project name, the control stations name and the control drawing name should be specified. The procedure to import a function block is as follows. 1.
First, create a function block on Control Drawing Builder or Function Block Overview Builder, then activate the Function Block Detail Builder. When the function block for import has already been created, then activate the Function Block Detail Builder by designating its tag name.
2.
Then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of the Function Block Detail Builder. An import dialog box will pop-out.
Import Look in :
Dr0001
FIC100.edf LIC100.edf PI100.edf PI200.edf PI300.edf TI100.edf
TI200.edf TI300.edf
File name :
FIC100
File of type :
Builder File (*.edf)
Open Cancel F020503E.EPS
Figure Function Block Import
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
3.
F2-45
Designate a function block file for import on the import dialog box. The path of the function block builder files for import is explained as follows. In the case of Path of project folder:
C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\
Project Name:
MYPJT
Station name:
FCS0101
Drawing name:
DR0001
Tag name:
FIC100
Then the path of the builder file can be specified as C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\Dr0001\ Specify FIC100 for [File name] and specify builder file type (*.edf) for [files of types]. 4.
If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, a dialog box will appear to prompt for confirmation.
Function Block Detail Builder Current information will be lost. Import ?
Yes
No F020504E.EPS
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box
5.
Click [Yes] to import the file. Thus the function block will be imported. At the same time, the tuning parameters of the function block will be imported together with the builder file of the function block.
6.
Then download the imported function block to FCS. The internal builder file will be replaced only when downloading is completed properly.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-46
● An Example of Control Drawing Import ¡ £ When importing builder files of control drawing, the information of function blocks and function blocks’ details in the control drawing will import together. The builder files of control drawings made on System View are located in the following directories, the file name format is “ControlDrawingName.edf.” • C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\(*1) • C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\(*2) *1: *2:
¡ The default location in CS 1000 system. £ The default location in CS 3000 system.
C:\Cs1000\eng\BKProject\:
Directory for the project
C:\Cs3000\eng\BKProject\:
Directory for the project
Mypjt:
Project name
Fcs0101:
Control station name
The path of the corresponding project, the project name and the control stations name should be specified. The procedure to import a control drawing is as follows. 1.
First, activate the Control Drawing Builder or Function Block Overview Builder.
2.
Then choose [External File] - [Import..] on [File] menu of the Control Drawing Builder or Function Block Overview Builder. An import dialog box will pop-out.
Import Look in :
FUNCTION_BLOCK
Dr0041 Dr0042 Dr0043 Dr0044 Dr0045 Dr0046 Dr0047 Dr0048
Dr0049 Dr0050 DR0001.edf DR0002.edf DR0003.edf DR0004.edf DR0005.edf DR0006.edf
File name :
DR0001
File of type :
Drawing File (*.edf)
DR0007.edf DR0008.edf DR0009.edf DR0010.edf DR0011.edf DR0012.edf DR0013.edf DR0014.edf
DR0 DR0 DR0 DR0 DR0 DR0 DR0 DR0
Open Cancel F020505E.EPS
Figure Control Drawing Import
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
3.
F2-47
Designate a function block file for import on the import dialog box. The path of the function block builder files for import is explained as follows. In the case of Path of project folder:
C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\
Project Name:
MYPJT
Station name:
FCS0101
Drawing name:
DR0001
Then the path of the builder file can be specified as C:\Cs1000\eng\BkProject\Mypjt\Fcs0101\FUNCTION_BLOCK\ Specify DR0001 for [File name] and specify builder file type (*.edf) for [files of types]. 4.
If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, a dialog box will appear to prompt for confirmation.
Control Drawing Builder Current information will be lost. Import ?
OK
Cancel F020506E.EPS
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box
5.
Click [Yes] will import the file. Then the control drawing and the function blocks in the drawing will be imported. At the same time, the tuning parameters of the function blocks will be imported together with the builder file of the control drawing.
6.
Then download the imported control drawing to FCS. The internal builder file will be replaced only when downloading is completed properly.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-48
● An Example of Window Hierarchy Import The information built in other projects, the window hierarchies of other HISs can be imported in the same manner of importing builder files. Before importing the information of other projects or importing the window hierarchies of other HISs, the files for importing must be created i.e. exported the files from the corresponding projects or HISs first. Furthermore, the imported window hierarchy consists of the information on the structure of folders and files only, each individual builder file needs to be imported separately on each graphic builder. Procedure for importing window hierarchy is indicated as follows. 1.
The file for import must be created first by exporting the information to the file from the projects or HISs on System View. Select the window folder under the HIS folder on System View. Then, choose [External File] - [Export Window Hierarchy..] on [File] menu on System View, an [Save As] dialog box will pop-out. The window hierarchy information will be exported into a CSV file. Specify the path for the file then click [Save] button to save the file.
Save As Save in :
Temp
Save
File name : Save as type :
Cancel
CSV Format File (*.csv)
F020507E.EPS
Figure SVA File Dialog Box
2.
Select the window folder under the HIS folder on System View, then choose [External File] - [Import Window Hierarchy..] on [File] menu, a dialog box will appear to prompt for confirmation.
BKESysView Current window hierarchy information will be lost. Import ?
OK
Cancel F020508E.EPS
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
3.
F2-49
To import the window hierarchy file, click [Yes], a dialog box will appear for file selection.
Open Look in :
Temp
ABC.CSV
File name :
ABC
File of type :
CSV Format File (*.csv)
Open Cancel F020509E.EPS
Figure File Open Dialog Box
4.
Specified the path and the name of the file, the [Files of types] is CSV type.
5.
If the specified contents are correct, then click [Open] button, the window hierarchy will be imported.
6.
After importing the window hierarchy, activate each Graphic Builder to import each graphic file. After importing the graphic files, download all imported files to HIS. Then the graphic files and the window hierarchy file will be downloaded.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-50
F2.6 Customization of System View Folder Icons The icons of the folders displayed in the tree view of System View can be customized. The bitmap files (.bmp) can be placed at a specified location, when System View starts, System View can use the bitmap files as the folder icons. With this capability, the System View folders can be identified by the graphical image of the icons. System View (CS 3000) -SYSTEM VIEW File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help a z All Folders SYSTEM VIEW -
Folder icon(*1) + +
Folder icon(*1)
+ +
Folder icon(*1)
+
87
Opened Folders : SYSTEM VIEW Name Type
Modified Date
MYPJT COMMON BATCH FCS0101 HIS0164 PJT01 COMMON FCS0101 HIS0164
2 projects
Tree view
List view
F020601E.EPS
πFigure System View *1:
This is an example of the default folder icons displayed on System View. These icons can be customized.
IMPORTANT When creating the bitmap files for folder icons, violations of copyright, portrait right and trademarks must be avoided.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-51
■ List of Customizable Folder Icons The customizable folder icons and the reserved bitmap file names and the corresponding folder names are listed in the following table. Table List of Customizable Folder Icons(1/2) Item
Folder
SYSTEM VIEW SYSTEM VIEW
PROJECT
BATCH
Bitmap file name
Remarks
SystemView.bmp
Project Name (Current Project)
PJT_CURRENT.bmp
The icon for the folder of the current project
Project Name (Non-Current Project)
PJT.bmp
The icon for the folder of the non-current project
COMMON
COMMON.bmp
MATRIX
MATRIX.bmp
BATCH
BATCH.bmp
COMMON_BLOCK
COMMON_BLOCK.bmp
RG{nn}
RG.bmp
(*1)
FCS{dd}{ss}
FCS.bmp
FCS, APCS and GSGW can use different icons.(*1)
FCS{dd}{ss} (APCS)
APCS.bmp
APCS, FCS and GSGW can use different icons.(*1)
FCS{dd}{ss} (GSGW)
GSGW.bmp
GSGW, FCS and APCS can use different icons.(*1)
CONFIGURATION
FCS_CONFIGURATION.bmp
SEQ_LIBRARY
SEQ_LIBRARY.bmp
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION
SEBOL_USER_FUNCTION.bmp
SFC_SEQUENCE
SFC_SEQUENCE.bmp
UNIT_PROCEDURE
UNIT_PROCEDURE.bmp
FCS
IOM
IOM.bmp
APCS
IOM2
IOM2.bmp
GSGW
NODE{n}
NODE.bmp
(*1)
{s}ALF111
ALF111.bmp
(*1)
NEST{n}
NEST.bmp
(*1)
SWITCH
SWITCH.bmp
MESSAGE
MESSAGE.bmp
FUNCTION_BLOCK
FUNCTION_BLOCK.bmp
DR{mmmm}
DR.bmp
DISPLAY
DISPLAY.bmp
LOGICCHART
LOGICCHART.bmp
APPLICATION
APPLICATION.bmp
USERCUSTOM
USERCUSTOM.bmp
(*1)
F020602E.EPS
nn: Recipe Group Number dd: Domain Number ss: Station Number n: Node Number; Nest Number s: Slot Number mmmm: Control Drawing Number *1:
Individual recipe group, domain, station, node, slot, nest and control drawing cannot have individual icon for each number. For an example, FCS0101 and FCS0102 must use the same icon.
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-52
Table List of Customizable Folder Icons(2/2) Item
Folder
HIS
BCV CGW STN
Bitmap file name
HIS{dd}{ss}
HIS.bmp
CONFIGURATION
HIS_CONFIGURATION.bmp
WINDOW
WINDOW.bmp
Graphic window
GRAPHIC.bmp
Remarks (*1)
Trend window
TREND.bmp
Shortcut window
SHORTCUT.bmp
HELP
HELP.bmp
BCVV{dd}{ss}
BCVV.bmp
(*1)
BCVH{dd}{ss}
BCVH.bmp
(*1)
BCVL{dd}{ss}
BCVL.bmp
(*1)
ACG{dd}{ss}
ACG.bmp
(*1)
STN{dd}{ss}
STN_PC.bmp
UHMIS, PC (*1)
STN{dd}{ss}
STN.bmp
other than UHMIS, PC (*1)
TAGLIST
TAGLIST.bmp F020603E.EPS
dd: ss:
Domain Number Station Number
*1:
Individual domain and station cannot have individual icon for each number. For an example, HIS0163 and HIS0164 must use the same icon.
■ Icon Customization Procedure The folder icon customization procedure is illustrated as follows. Start
Create the icon bitmap file
Save the icon bitmap file to the designated path
Start System View
End F020604E.EPS
Figure Icon Customization Procedure
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
F2-53
● Create Icon Bitmap File Use an image bitmap editor program such as Paint program in Microsoft OS environment to create the image. • Image Size 16 x 16 Pixels • Icon File Name Use the reserved file name corresponds to the folder and then affix the bitmap file extension (.bmp). SEE ALSO For more information about the customizable folder icons and the reserved file names for the icon files, see the following in the previous section: “■ List of Customizable Folder Icons”
● Save Icon Bitmap File The created icon bitmap file should be saved to the following path. If the bitmap file exists in the other PC, the file can be copied from the other PC to this path. \eng\Icon\Systemview\
● Start System View When System Views starts, it reads the user-defined icon bitmap files and displays them as the corresponding folder icons on the System View. For the folders that the user-defined icon files are not found, the default icons will be displayed.
■ Icon Bitmap Sample Files The sample files of icon images are available. These file can be used for customizing the folder icons. When using these icon files, the files need to be copied from the following location to the above designated icon file path. \eng\Icon\Systemview\sample\
IM 33S01B30-01E
11th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
Blank Page
F3-1
F3. Control Drawing Builder The Control Drawing Builder is used to configure the basic control functions of the FCS. With the Control Drawing Builder, operations such as registering function blocks in the drawing file and determining the flow of data between function blocks can be performed graphically.
■ Overview of the Control Drawing Builder ¡ £ With the Control Drawing Builder, the basic control functions of the FCS can be configured in the window by combining objects. When doing so, multiple drawing files can be opened at the same time to compare their contents, while each file can be edited and saved separately. Text
Function block symbol
ABCD IN
FIC0002
OUT
PID FIC0001
OUT
Data link block symbol
Wiring
PVI
FIC0004 F030001E.EPS
Figure Configuring Basic Control Functions by Object Combination
There are four types of object; function block, data link block, wiring and text. The function block and data link block are objects but referred to as block symbols. Up to 100 function blocks can be defined in one control drawing (*1). *1:
¡ For the standard type PFCS (PFCS-S/PFCD-S) of the CS 1000 system with the software release number R1.0, this number becomes 20. Moreover, control drawing is an optional package for CS 1000.
● Function Block The object that represents the function block is called function block symbol. Tag name Symbol shape Block area Terminal name IN
FIC0001
OUT
PID I/O connection terminal (Terminal area) Terminal name area
Function Block type F030002E.EPS
Figure A Function Block Symbol
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-2
The block symbols have the following properties. • Symbol name • Symbol shape • Tag name entry area • Block model entry area • I/O connection terminals • Block area • Terminal area • I/O connection information (some shapes of symbols do not have this property) The basic definition items for function block symbols may be defined on the control drawing builder. The so-called basic definition means to modify the settings on the property sheet of the function block or Function Block Overview dialog box. A number of items of the basic definition may be displayed on the Control Drawing Builder. The displayed information is rerred as block comment. The displayed block comment varies with the shape of block symbol. SEE ALSO For details on the display of the block comment, see the following: F3.11, “Displaying Block Comment for Block Symbols”
10.00-50.00 M3/H IN FLOW
FIC0001
OUT
PID
Block comment F030003E.EPS
Figure Block Comment
● Data Link Block As with the function block, the object that represents the data link block is called data link block symbol. The data link block is used when connecting a function block with another function block or connecting a process I/O or software I/O. Two types of data link blocks are available: I/O data link block and external data link block. An I/O data link block can connect to a process I/O or software I/O. An external data link block can connect to a function block defined in other control drawings or a function block defined on other control stations.
I/O data link block
External data link block F030004E.EPS
Figure Data Link Block Symbols
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-3
● Wiring This object represents the flow of data between function blocks or between a function block and a data link block.
IN
FIC0002
Function block symbol
IN
FIC0001
OUT
PID
OUT Wiring
PID
F030005E.EPS
Figure A Wiring
● Text This object represents an arbitrary character string. Text Function block symbol
ABCD IN
FIC0002
OUT
PID F030006E.EPS
Figure A Text
■ Window Configuration of the Control Drawing Builder A drawing window and a toolbar are displayed in the Control Drawing Builder. The drawing window is displayed for each drawing file and consists of a function block overview pane and a drawing pane. Control Drawing Builder
Toolbar
DR0001
DR0002
Drawing pane
Function block overview pane F030007E.EPS
Figure Function Block Overview Pane and Drawing Pane
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-4
● Function Block Overview Pane The function block overview pane displays a list of registered function blocks. A function block can be registered in a drawing file from the function block overview pane. The line number in the function block overview pane represents the control sequence in the control drawing. Line number
Tag Name Model Name Tag Comment 001 002 003 004 005
Tag comment
Model name entry area Tag name entry area F030008E.EPS
Figure Function Block Overview Pane
It is possible to hide the function block overview pane display. To show or hide the function block overview pane can be switched by clicking [Function Block Overview] from the [View] menu. SEE ALSO For details on function block registration, see the following: F3.3, “Registering Function Blocks”
● Drawing Pane The drawing pane displays function blocks and data link blocks as block symbols. The flow of data between function blocks or between a function block and a data link block is displayed as wiring. During the process of configuring the basic control functions, function blocks can be registered in a drawing file from the drawing pane, wiring can be drawn, and the properties for objects can be set. Also, whenever a function block registered in the drawing pane changes tag name or code, the change will be reflected in the tag name entry area or model name entry area of the function block overview pane.
Wiring Block symbol
F030009E.EPS
Figure Drawing Pane
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-5
● Toolbar Icon buttons displayed in the upper area of the window provide the same functions as the menu. This series of icon buttons is called toolbar.
F030010E.EPS
Figure Draw Toolbar
Whether the icon buttons comprising the toolbar are displayed or not displayed can be set in the dialog box that appears when [Toolbar] is selected from the [View] menu. The four toolbars available are “Standard,” “Draw,” “Format” and “Edit object.” The Standard toolbar consists of the following icon buttons: • Open • Create Working File • Save • Print • Print preview • Cut • Copy • Paste • Undo • Grid • Zoom in • Zoom out • Area zoom • Specify Zoom size • Edit Function Block Detail The Draw toolbar consists of the following icon buttons: • Select mode • Function block • Wiring • Text The Format toolbar consists of the following icon buttons: • Font type • Font size • Alignment (Left Justification, Center, Right Justification) • Bold • Italic • Underline • Text color • Properties IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-6
The Edit Object toolbar consists of the following icon buttons: • Align • Distribute • Group • Ungroup
■ Flow of Configuring Basic Control Functions in the Control Drawing Builder When configuring basic control functions in the Control Drawing Builder, first change the drawing file settings and the grid on the window. After these settings are completed, configure the basic control functions in the following steps. 1.
Set the settings related to the control drawing windows on the Status Display Setting dialog box started from System View.
2.
Register function blocks using the function block overview pane or the drawing pane and draw block symbols.
3.
Set the properties sheet for the function blocks or Function Block Overview dialog box.
4.
Draw data link blocks.
5.
Draw wiring and decide on the flow of data between the function blocks.
6.
Change the control sequence for the function blocks as necessary.
In addition to the above steps, create copies of the objects to efficiently set the definition contents or adjust the object arrangement as necessary, and proceed with configuration.
● Cautions when Registering Function Blocks Function blocks should be arranged to the control drawing files with consideration of the control flow. The function blocks connected to each other and the function blocks related to the same control scheme should be put into the same drawing file. Especially, for the control sequence with expanded sequence tables, the rule extension tables should be put in the same drawing of the original sequence tables. SEE ALSO For more information about rule extension sequence table, see the following: D3.2, “Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E)”
■ Text File Import and Export On the Control Drawing Builder, the information of a control drawing can be exported into a text file, vice versa, a text file of control drawing can be imported. Thus the control drawing files created by external tools or exported from the builder can be used. Nevertheless, the parameters of the function blocks can not be imported or exported.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-7
■ CS Source File Import A CENTUM CS control drawing source file can be imported and reused as CS 1000 or CS 3000 control drawing file. Nevertheless, CENTUM CS can not use the text file exported from CS 1000 or CS 3000 Control Drawing Builder.
■ Builders Used with the Control Drawing Builder In the process of configuring the basic control functions, use the Function Block Detail Builder and Status Display Builder as necessary.
● Function Block Detail Builder Details for the function blocks registered in the drawing file are set in the Control Drawing Builder or the Function Block Detail Builder.
● Status Display Builder When the drawing file is downloaded to the FCS after the basic control functions have been configured with the Control Drawing Builder, a status display file is created. To add a picture of the plant or a display area for process data to the Graphical window display created with the Control Drawing Builder, start the status display builder and edit the status display file. SEE ALSO Foundation fieldbus faceplate block engineering can be performed on Fieldbus Builder. For more information about Fieldbus engineering, see the following: D2, “Fieldbus Builder” of FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-8
F3.1 Changing Drawing File Settings Settings for the drawing window size or the line type for wiring in the drawing pane can be changed for each drawing file in the property sheet.
■ Drawing File Properties ▼ Setting the Drawing File
Select a drawing file in the System View, then select [Properties] from the [File] menu to display the property sheet. The property sheet for the drawing file consists of the following two tabs: • Outline tab This tab displays file name, project name, builder revision, update date and time, creation date and time, and file comment. • Attribute tab This tab is used to change the window size and line type for wiring. When the [OK] button is selected and the property sheet closed, the changes are saved in the drawing file.
■ Attribute Tab The attributes of drawing files and the line types for wiring may be set on the attribute tab. File Properties Outline Attribute Size
Small
Large ⫻
800
536
Line style of wiring Direct Direction
Reverse Direction
OK
Cancel F030101E.EPS
Figure File Properties Sheet
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-9
● Window Size Use the slider to select a window size from the following five sizes: • 1600⫻1072 (maximum size) • 1280⫻858 • 1024⫻686 (default size) • 800⫻536 • 640⫻429 (minimum size) As long as the size is within the range between the maximum and minimum sizes, the spin box can be used to set the vertical and horizontal dimensions in dots. Also, the size can be entered directly from the keyboard.
● Line Type for Wiring Select the line type for forward wiring or backward wiring. Line type can be selected from solid line, dashed line, chain line, single-chain line and double-chain line. Forward wiring means wiring that follows the control sequence in the control drawing. Backward wiring means wiring in the reverse direction from the control sequence. In the order that displays on the function block list pane. (invisible)
1
2 FIC001
OUT
FIC002
SET
PID
PID Forward wiring
1
2 FIC001
SET
OUT
FIC002
PID
PID Backward wiring F030102E.EPS
Figure Forward Wiring and Backward Wiring
SEE ALSO For details on forward wiring and backward wiring, see the following: F3.6, “Changing Function Block Control Sequence”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-10
F3.2 Changing Grid The grid displayed in the drawing pane can be changed. The grid can be changed in the Grid Option dialog box.
■ How to Change the Grid ▼ Grid Option
A grid can be displayed in the drawing pane to facilitate the positioning of symbol blocks and wiring being drawn. When [Grid Option] is selected from the [Draw] menu, the Grid Option dialog box for setting the drawing pane grid is displayed. Grid Option Grid Type Point
Grid
Grid Color Gray 75 Display grid Grid Size OK
4 Cancel F030201E.EPS
Figure Grid Option Dialog Box
The following items can be changed in the Grid Option dialog box. • Grid type • Grid color • Show/hide grid • Grid size The new grid settings will be reflected when the [OK] button in the Grid Option dialog box is selected and the dialog box closed. These settings are saved when the Control Drawing Builder is closed and become effective when the builder is started next time.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-11
F3.3 Registering Function Blocks Function blocks can be registered from either the function block overview pane or the drawing pane. In the drawing pane, registering a function block and creating its block symbol are performed at the same time.
■ Registering from the Function Block Overview Pane ▼ Registering from the Function Block Overview Pane
Register a function block from the function block overview pane, then create a block symbol in the drawing pane.
● Registering the Function Block To register a function block from the function block overview pane, select the line number, then perform the following operation: • Select [Insert] - [Function Block] from the pop-up menu displayed when the right mouse button is clicked. The Select Function Block dialog box appears, displaying a list of function blocks that can be registered. Select Function Block Regulatory Control Block Sequence General-Purpose Calculations SFC Blocks Operation Switch Instruments Sequence Elements 1 Faceplate Blocks Logic Operation Blocks Sequence Elements 2 Batch Data Sequence [M-Size] Sequence [L-Size] Unit Supervision Link Block
Model Name
PVI
Symbol
<<
OK
Symbol List
>>
Cancel F030301E.EPS
Figure Select Function Block Dialog Box
Select the function block model name. Thus, the function block is registered. There are other ways to register function blocks. For example, function blocks can be registered by entering the tag name and model name directly in the tag name entry area and model name entry area of the function block overview pane.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-12
● Creating a Block Symbol Click a line number then drag the function block from the function block overview pane and drop it inside the drawing pane. A block symbol is created where the line was dropped. If the block is not defined with tag name, then enter the tag name in the tag name entry area for this block symbol. The entered tag name will be reflected in the tag name entry area of the function block overview pane. Select a function block 001 002 003 004 005
Drag and drop Tag name entry area F030302E.EPS
Figure Creating One Block Symbol
Multiple function blocks can be dragged and dropped. In this case, multiple block symbols will be created where the blocks were dropped. The blocks created on the drawing have the following layout.
Select multiple blocks while holding the [Shift] key
001 002 003 004 005
Drag and drop
F030303E.EPS
Figure Creating Multiple Block Symbols
SEE ALSO For the details of block symbol shapes, see the following: “■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-13
■ Registering from the Drawing Pane ▼ Registering from the Drawing Pane
In the drawing pane, registering a function block and creating its block symbol are performed at the same time. With the drawing pane in active status, use one of the following methods. • Select [Function Block] from the [Insert] menu. • Click [Function Block] button in the toolbar.
F030304E.EPS
Figure Function Block Button
Then Select Function Block dialog box will appear. Select Function Block Regulatory Control Block Sequence General-Purpose Calculations SFC Blocks Operation Switch Instruments Sequence Elements 1 Faceplate Blocks Logic Operation Blocks Sequence Elements 2 Batch Data Unit Supervision Link Block
Model Name
PVI
Symbol
<<
OK
Symbol List
>>
Cancel F030305E.EPS
Figure Select Function Block Dialog Box
Select the function block model name and block symbol shape. The block symbol shape can also be selected in the Select Symbol dialog box displayed when [Symbol List] is clicked. Select Symbol Symbol Name
Symbol
Box-8x8 Circle-8x8
OK
Cancel F030306E.EPS
Figure Select Symbol Dialog Box
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-14
SEE ALSO For the details of block symbol shapes, see the following: “■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £”
After the Select Function Block dialog box is closed, click on any place in the drawing pane. The function block is registered and a block symbol is created at the same time. Enter the tag name in the tag name entry area for this block symbol. The entered tag name will be reflected in the tag name entry area of the function block overview pane. After entering the tag name for the block symbol, continue by clicking on a different place in the drawing pane. A block symbol of the same model name and same symbol shape as the previously created symbol will be created. Enter the tag name in the tag name entry area for this block symbol. The entered tag name will be reflected in the tag name entry area of the function block overview pane.
■ Points to Note when Changing Block Symbols The shape of a block symbol that has been created in the drawing pane can be changed. When changing the symbol shape, take note of the following points: • Properties of wiring connected to the block symbol (automatic wiring or manual wiring) are retained even when the shape of the block symbol is changed. • Wiring whose connection destination is lost as a result of the reduced number of terminals available with the new block symbol will change to auxiliary wiring. SEE ALSO For auxiliary wiring, see the following: F3.12, “Drawing Wiring”
• When there are multiple block symbols of the same tag name in the drawing pane, changing the shape of one block symbol does not affected other symbols. • Once the shape of the block symbol is changed, the change cannot be canceled (undo). • When the shape of a block symbol with a connection information entry area is changed, the connection information will be deleted. Even if the new block symbol has a connection information entry area, the connection information stored prior to the change is deleted. • If the block model name is same, multiple block symbols can be selected to change their shapes at the same time.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-15
■ Overview of Block Symbols ¡ £ The system provides block symbols for different categories of the function block. This section describes the block symbols provided by the system.
● Block Symbols Used for Regulatory Control Blocks, Sequence Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks The figure below shows block symbols that can be used for regulatory control blocks, sequence control blocks and calculation blocks: Tag name
Tag name
Tag name
Tag name
Function Block type
Function Block type
Function Block type
Function Block type
Box-8x8
Circle-8x8
Box2-8x8
Circle2-8x8 F030307E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for Regulatory Control Blocks, Sequence Control Blocks and Calculation Blocks
Box type and Circle type have the same functions. The only differences are the symbol shape and the number of their I/O terminals. The symbols of Box2-8x8 and Circle2-8x8 are used only for Foundation fieldbus faceplate blocks.
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-16
● Block Symbol Used for Representative Alarm Block The figure below shows a block symbol that can be used only for Representative Alarm (ALM-R) block: Q01˜16-8 block symbol may be used for ALM-R block only. Tag name Model name Q01
(Q01)
Q02
(Q02)
Q03
(Q03)
Q04
(Q04)
Q05
(Q05)
Q06
(Q06)
Q07
(Q07)
Q08
(Q08)
Q09
(Q09)
Q10
(Q10)
Q11
(Q11)
Q12
(Q12)
Q13
(Q13)
Q14
(Q14)
Q15
(Q15)
Q16
(Q16)
Connection information entry area
Q01~16-8 F030308E.EPS
Figure Block Symbol Used Only for Representative Alarm Block
● Block Symbol Used for Sequence Control Blocks The figure below shows a block symbol that can be used only for sequence control blocks: Sheet-8x8 block symbol may be used for sequence control blocks such as ST16, ST16E, and LC64 models. Tag name Model name Sheet-8x8 F030309E.EPS
Figure Block Symbol Used for Sequence Control Blocks
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-17
● Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks ¡ £ The figure below shows block symbols that can be used only for calculation blocks:
ADD
MUL
AVE
DIV
(W.O)
AND (*1)
OR (*1)
NOT (*1)
WOUT (*1)
S
S1
S
S2
R1
R
R2
R
SRS1-S (*1)
SRS1-R (*1)
SRS2-S (*1)
SRS2-R (*1)
OND (*1)
OFFD (*1)
TON (*1)
TOFF (*1)
⬎
⭌
⫽
GT (*1)
GE (*1)
GQ (*1) F030310E.EPS
*1:
£ The block symbols may only be applied in CS 3000 system.
Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (1/5) ¡ £
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-18
SW=0˜3-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model SW33. SW=0˜9-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model SW91. Tag name
Model name
0 1 2 3 SW=0~3-8
Tag name
Model name
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SW=0~9-8 F030311E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (2/5)
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-19
SW=0˜16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model DSW16 or DSW16C. Tag name
Model name
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SW=0~16-8 F030312E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (3/5)
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-20
J01˜16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model BDSET-1L, BDSET-1C, BDA-L or BDA-C. Tag name Model name J01 J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J07 J08 J09 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
Connection information entry area (J01) Connection information entry area (J02) Connection information entry area (J03) Connection information entry area (J04) Connection information entry area (J05) Connection information entry area (J06) Connection information entry area (J07) Connection information entry area (J08) Connection information entry area (J09) Connection information entry area (J10) Connection information entry area (J11) Connection information entry area (J12) Connection information entry area (J13) Connection information entry area (J14) Connection information entry area (J15) Connection information entry area (J16) J01~16-8 F030313E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (4/5)
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-21
J01˜J16-8 block symbol may be used for calculation block model BDSET-2L or BDSET-2C. Tag name Model name J01 J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J07 J08 J09 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
Connection information entry area (J01) Connection information entry area (J02) Connection information entry area (J03) Connection information entry area (J04) Connection information entry area (J05) Connection information entry area (J06) Connection information entry area (J07) Connection information entry area (J08) Connection information entry area (J09) Connection information entry area (J10) Connection information entry area (J11) Connection information entry area (J12) Connection information entry area (J13) Connection information entry area (J14) Connection information entry area (J15) Connection information entry area (J16) J01~16-8 F030314E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for Calculation Blocks (5/5)
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-22
● Block Symbols Used for Data Link Blocks Data link blocks include I/O data link blocks (PIO) and external data link blocks (AREAIN/ AREAOUT). The figure below shows block symbols that can be used for I/O data link blocks: For I/O data link blocks, two kinds of symbols SIO-8 and PIO-8 are available. The only differences between SIO-8 and PIO-8 are the size of the block symbol and the number of the I/O terminals. Tag name
Tag name
SIO-8
PIO-8 F030315E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for I/O Data Link Blocks
The figure below shows block symbols that can be used only for external data link blocks: For external data link blocks, AREAIN or AREAOUT, two kinds of symbols Right-8 and Left8 are available. The only difference between Right-8 and Left-8 is the direction of block symbols. AREAIN Tag name
Tag name
Right-8
Left-8
Tag name
Tag name
Right-8
Left-8
AREAOUT
F030316E.EPS
Figure Block Symbols Used for External Data Link Blocks
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-23
■ Usage of I/O Data Link Blocks (PIO) and External Data Link Blocks (AREAIN/AREAOUT) When applying the data link blocks, the I/O Data Link Blocks (PIO) and External Data Link Blocks (AREAIN/AREAOUT) are applied differently in accordance with the connection types and I/O signal types, shown as follows. Moreover, in the following table, the linked information can be carried out by the data link blocks are indicated in the column of Linked Information. Table Linked Information of the Applied Data Link Blocks Connection
Data Reference
I/O
Data Setting
PIO
TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem
Communication I/O (*2)
PIO
TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem
Fieldbus I/O
PIO
TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem
Software I/O
PIO
TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem
Same Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different FCS
AREAOUT
TagName.DataItem
Process I/O
PIO
TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem
Communication I/O (*2)
PIO
TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem
Fieldbus I/O
PIO
TagName/Label/TerminalNumber.DataItem
Software I/O
PIO
TagName/ElementNumber.DataItem
Same Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different FCS
AREAOUT
TagName.DataItem
Same Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different Drawing
AREAIN
TagName.DataItem
Different FCS
AREAOUT
TagName.DataItem
Function Block
Terminal Connection
Condition Test
Function Block
Process I/O Communication I/O (*2) Fieldbus I/O Status Manipulation Software I/O
Sequence Connection
Linked Information (*1)
Process I/O
Function Block Data Connection
Data Link Block
PIO AREAIN AREAOUT
TagName/Label/TerminalNumber. DataItem.Condition TagName/ElementNumber. DataItem.Manipulation F030317E.EPS
*1: *2:
“A/B/..” indicates that the linked information can be described in different ways. However, a part of the information may not be available due to the restrictions of element type or etc. I/O signals of subsystems via communication modules.
● Cautions when Using Data Link Blocks for Connection • On the Function Block Detail Builder, when describing the logic name for connecting a function block of a different FCS, a (>) is prefixed to the tag name. However, this prefix can not be used for the AREAOUT data link block in control drawing. • When drawing a connection between two terminals, the function blocks of source and destination of the connection needs to be described as linked information. If only one side information is available, the other side information is not, the terminal connection can not be established. Furthermore, if both blocks are in the same control drawing, and if only one side information for connection is available, the wiring for the connection will be removed when the drawing is updated.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-24
F3.4 Changing Function Block Properties Properties of the function block can be changed from the function block overview pane or the drawing pane. Use the property sheet to change the properties.
■ Function Block Property Sheet ▼ Function Block Properties
A property sheet is provided for a function block to set the basic definition items of the function block. The property sheet can be opened from the function block overview pane or the drawing pane. Perform any one of the following operations to open the property sheet from the function block overview pane: • Choosing a function block, select [Properties] from the [Format] menu. • Double-click on the number. • Choosing a line number, click on the right mouse button and select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed. Perform any one of the following operations to open the property sheet from the drawing pane: • Choosing the block symbol for the function block, select [Properties] from the [Format] menu. • Double-click on the block symbol for the function block. • Choosing the block symbol for the function block, click on the right mouse button and select [Properties] from the pop-up menu displayed. The function block property sheet consists of the following two tabs: • Common tab This tab is used to change the position of the block symbol (X coordinate, Y coordinate). • Function block tab This tab is used to change function block properties such as tag name and tag comment. • Fieldbus Tab This is a tab for defining Foundation Fieldbus faceplate block properties such as Device Tag, Block ID, Sub-Scheduler Number and so on. SEE ALSO For more information about Foundation fieldbus faceplate engineering, see the following: D1.2, “Creating a New FF Faceplate Block” of “FOUNDATION fieldbus Reference” (IM 33Y05P10-01E)
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-25
■ Function Block Tab The definition items may be set on Function Block tab are shown as follows. Model name change button Function Block Common Function Block Tag Name
FI001
Model Name
PVI
Tag Comment
FLOW A
Scal
Low limit value
0.0
High limit value
100
Engineering Unit Symbol
%
Input Signal Conversion
No
Totalizer Time Unit
None
Tag Mark
General
Alarm Level
Medium
Lvl
4
Upper Equipment Name
Cell 1
Symbol
<<
OK
Symbol List
Cancel
>>
Apply F030401E.EPS
Figure Function Block Tab
● Tag Name Enter a tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters. The reserved device names of windows can not be used as tag names, such as A: to Z:, CON, AUX, CLOCK$, NUL, PRN, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9
IMPORTANT If a tag name that is already registered in the FCS is duplicated and used in the Control Drawing Builder, an error occurs when save the drawing file. Also, if a tag name that is already used in the control drawing is entered, an error occurs when confirm the entry.
● Model Name This indicates the model name of the function block. Select the Model name change button to change the model name. The Select Function Block dialog box will appear. Changing the model name, the default values set by the system will replace the existing contents defined for the function block. SEE ALSO For details on function block model names, see the following: Part D, “Function Block Details”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-26
● Tag Comment Enter a comment for the tag using up to 24 single-byte alphanumeric characters or 12 double-byte characters. SEE ALSO For details on tag commen, see the following: F2.2, “Comment”
● Scale Low Limit Value Enter the low limit value for the process variable of engineering unit data as a value consisting of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. For example, if the range of the process variable is between -20.0 and 120.0 ⬚C, enter “-20.0.”
● Scale High Limit Value Enter the high limit value for the process variable as a value consisting of 7 digits or less including the sign and decimal point. For example, if the range of the process variable is between -20.0 and 120.0 ⬚C, enter “120.0.”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-27
● Engineering Unit Symbol Designate an engineering unit for the process variable. When automatically registering engineering unit is enabled, the engineering unit for the function block can be selected from the combo box. If the desired unit can not be found in the box, a new user-defined engineering unit can be typed in directly. When saving the control drawing, the entered new engineering unit will be automatically registered in the list of engineering unit file, which is common for the whole project. When type in the unit, up to 6 single-byte character or 3 double-byte characters can be used. However, the∆ollowing characters can not be used in the string. Moreover, the space character at the end of string will be ignored. • (,) comma • (“) double quotation If the automatically registering engineering unit is not enabled, the engineering unit can only be entered by selecting from the combo box. The main engineering units for selection are as follows: • % • S • MIN • HR • D • DEGC SEE ALSO For more information about registering engineering units, see the following: “■ Detailed Setting of Project” in F1.2, “Creating a New Project”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-28
● Input Signal Conversion Specify the method by which to convert input signals. The input signal conversion method can be selected from the combo box, or can be entered directly using the keyboard. The definition contents are shown below: • No • Square Root • Pulse Train Input • 2-position Status Input • 3-position Status Input • Code Input • Communication Input • Control Priority Type Pulse Train Input • Exact Totalization Pulse Train Input SEE ALSO For details on input signal conversion, see the following: C3.1, “Input Signal Conversion”
● Totalizer Time Unit Specify the unit for the totalizer time. The definition contents are shown below: • None • Second • Minute • Hour • Day SEE ALSO For details on totalizer time unit, see the following: C3.3, “Integration”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-29
● Types of Tag Marks Specify the priority level for the tag mark and whether or not an acknowledgment operation is performed at the time of status change. The tag mark type can be selected from the combo box, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shown below: • Important with Ack. • General • Aux.1 • Aux.2 • Important • General with Ack. • Aux.1 with Ack. • Aux.2 with Ack. SEE ALSO For details on tag mark, see the following: “■ Tag Mark - Status Display Area” in E8.1, “Components of Instrument Faceplate”
● Alarm Processing Level Specify the priority of alarm processing. The alarm processing level can be selected from the combo box, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shown below: • High • Medium • Low • Logging • User [5] • User [6] • User [7] • User [8] • User [9] • User [10] • User [11] • User [12] • User [13] • User [14] • User [15] • User [16] SEE ALSO For details on alarm processing levels, see the following: C5.16, “Alarm Processing Levels”
IM 33S01B30-01E
12th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
F3-30
● Security Level Specify the security level for the function block. The security level can be selected from the combo box, or it can be entered directly using the keyboard. The contents are shown below: • 1 • 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 6 • 7 • 8 SEE ALSO For details on security levels, see the following: F9.4, “Function Block Security”
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-31
● Upper Equipment Name The name of the higher-level process equipment group in plant hierarchy can be designated by selecting one from the combo box, or by directly entering from keyboard. When entering from keyboard up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used. However, the following character strings can not be used. • Double-byte characters • Single-byte alphanumeric lower-case characters • ALL • NONE • A string started with %DR • A string that contains the following characters •
(,) comma
•
(@) At mark
•
Single-byte space
•
(:) colon
•
(*) asterisk An (*) character can be used by itself.
When Upper Equipment Name is omitted, the equipment name for the control drawing will be registered as the upper equipment for the function block when saving (and downloading) the control drawing. When the upper equipment name is dynamically set by SEBOL or other programs, enter (*) asterisks into this column, thus, the default upper equipment name will not automatically set to the block when saving (and downloading) the control drawing. SEE ALSO For more information about Upper Equipment, see the following: “■ Upper Equipment Name” in E10.2.2, “Registering Custom Equipment (Other than Unit Equipment)”
● Block Symbol Select the block symbol to be created in the drawing pane. The shape of the block symbol can be selected using the [Symbol List] button, [<<] button or [>>] button.
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
F3-32
F3.5 Changing Data Link Block Properties Properties of the data link block can be changed from the drawing pane. Use the property sheet to change the properties.
■ Data Link Block Property Sheet ▼ Data Link Block Properties
Select a data link block in the drawing pane, then select [Properties] from the [Format] menu. The data link block property sheet consists of the following two tabs: • Common tab This tab is used to change the position of the block symbol (X coordinate, Y coordinate). • Data link block tab This tab is used to change the data link block type and connection information.
■ Data Link Block Tab The data link block is used when connecting a function block to another function block or when connecting a process I/O or software I/O. There are two types of data link blocks: I/O data link block and external data link block. I/O data link blocks can be connected to a process I/O or software I/O. External data link blocks can be connected to a function block defined in other control drawings or on other FCSs. Link Block Common Link Block Type
AREAIN
Connection Information
FIC004.SET
Symbol
<<
Symbol List
>>
OK
Cancel
Apply F030501E.EPS
Figure Data Link Block Property Tab
IM 33S01B30-01E
10th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
